Appendix A-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007 - 01)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R007
Product Description
Issue Date Part Number
01 2007-06-15 31400815
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Copyright 2007 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Network Application.................................................................................................................1-1 2 Function........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Capacity...........................................................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity.........................................................................................................................2-3 2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity..............................................................................................................................2-4 2.2 Service.............................................................................................................................................................2-6 2.2.1 SDH Services.........................................................................................................................................2-6 2.2.2 PDH Services.........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.3 Ethernet Services....................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.4 RPR Services..........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.5 ATM Services........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.6 DDN Services.........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.7 SAN Services.........................................................................................................................................2-7 2.2.8 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................................2-8 2.3 Interface...........................................................................................................................................................2-9 2.3.1 Service Interfaces...................................................................................................................................2-9 2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces..............................................................................................2-10 2.4 Networking....................................................................................................................................................2-11 2.5 Built-in WDM Technology...........................................................................................................................2-13 2.6 ROPA System...............................................................................................................................................2-13 2.7 Intelligent Power Adjustment........................................................................................................................2-14 2.8 External Clock Output Shutdown Function..................................................................................................2-14 2.9 Extended Subrack..........................................................................................................................................2-14 2.10 Board REG Function...................................................................................................................................2-15 2.11 Protection....................................................................................................................................................2-17 2.11.1 Equipment Level Protection...............................................................................................................2-17 2.11.2 Network Level Protection..................................................................................................................2-18 2.12 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................................2-18 2.13 TCM............................................................................................................................................................2-19 2.14 E13/M13 Function.......................................................................................................................................2-19 2.15 RPR.............................................................................................................................................................2-19 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i
Contents
2.16 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................................2-20 2.17 Software Package Loading..........................................................................................................................2-20 2.18 Hot Fix.........................................................................................................................................................2-21 2.19 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression..................................................................................................................2-21 2.20 PRBS Function............................................................................................................................................2-21 2.21 Board Version Replacement........................................................................................................................2-22 2.22 OAM Information Interworking..................................................................................................................2-22 2.23 Clock...........................................................................................................................................................2-23
3 Hardware......................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.3 Subrack............................................................................................................................................................3-4 3.3.1 Subrack Structure...................................................................................................................................3-4 3.3.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................3-5 3.3.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-28 3.4 Boards............................................................................................................................................................3-29 3.4.1 Board Type...........................................................................................................................................3-29 3.4.2 SDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-33 3.4.3 PDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-35 3.4.4 DDN Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-36 3.4.5 Data Processing Boards........................................................................................................................3-37 3.4.6 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................................3-39 3.4.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards........................................................................................................3-39 3.4.8 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................................3-40
4 Software....................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 Board Software................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.3 NE Software....................................................................................................................................................4-3 4.4 T2000 System..................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.5 ASON Software...............................................................................................................................................4-5
5 Data Features...............................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Ethernet Features.............................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................................5-2 5.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................5-7 5.1.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-11 5.2 RPR Features.................................................................................................................................................5-14 5.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-14 5.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-18 5.2.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-20 5.3 ATM Features...............................................................................................................................................5-23 5.3.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-23 ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Contents
5.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-25 5.3.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-29 5.4 SAN Features................................................................................................................................................5-30 5.5 DDN Features................................................................................................................................................5-31 5.5.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-31 5.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-32
6 DCN Features..............................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN......................................................................................................................6-2 6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions..............................................................................................................................6-3 6.2 HWECC..........................................................................................................................................................6-4 6.2.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-4 6.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-5 6.3 IP Over DCC...................................................................................................................................................6-6 6.3.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-6 6.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-6 6.4 OSI Over DCC................................................................................................................................................6-7 6.4.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-8 6.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-8
7 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies.........................................................................................................7-3 7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links..........................................................................................................7-3 7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links..................................................................................................................7-4 7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration..................................................................................................................7-5 7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration................................................................................................7-6 7.4 SLA.................................................................................................................................................................7-7 7.5 Diamond Services...........................................................................................................................................7-8 7.6 Gold Services................................................................................................................................................7-12 7.7 Silver Services...............................................................................................................................................7-13 7.8 Copper Services.............................................................................................................................................7-15 7.9 Iron Services..................................................................................................................................................7-16 7.10 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................................7-17 7.11 Service Association.....................................................................................................................................7-18 7.12 Service Optimization...................................................................................................................................7-19 7.13 Service Migration........................................................................................................................................7-20 7.14 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................................7-20 7.15 Preset Restoring Trail..................................................................................................................................7-21 7.16 Equilibrium of Network Traffic..................................................................................................................7-21 7.17 Shared Risk Link Group..............................................................................................................................7-22 7.18 ASON Trail Group......................................................................................................................................7-22 7.19 Protocol Encryption.....................................................................................................................................7-23
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
iii
Contents
8 Protection.....................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 Equipment Level Protection............................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards..................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units....................................................................8-3 8.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit.........................................................................................................8-4 8.1.4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Boards..........................................................................8-4 8.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards............................................................................................................ 8-5 8.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit....................................................................................... 8-6 8.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit....................................................................................8-6 8.1.8 Intelligent Fans.......................................................................................................................................8-6 8.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply.............................................................................. 8-7 8.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions.....................................................................8-7 8.2 Network Level Protection............................................................................................................................... 8-7 8.2.1 Linear MSP............................................................................................................................................ 8-8 8.2.2 MSP Ring...............................................................................................................................................8-9 8.2.3 SNCP....................................................................................................................................................8-11 8.2.4 DNI.......................................................................................................................................................8-15 8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection..................................................................................................8-16 8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP....................................................................................................................8-17 8.2.7 RPR Protection.....................................................................................................................................8-18 8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection..............................................................................................................8-19
9 Clock.............................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Clock Source...................................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.1 External Clock Source............................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.2 Line Clock Source..................................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source..........................................................................................................................9-2 9.1.4 Internal Clock Source.............................................................................................................................9-3 9.2 Clock Working Mode......................................................................................................................................9-3 9.2.1 Locked Mode..........................................................................................................................................9-3 9.2.2 Hold-Over Mode....................................................................................................................................9-3 9.2.3 Free-Run Mode...................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.3 Clock Outputs..................................................................................................................................................9-3 9.4 Clock Protection..............................................................................................................................................9-4 9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled ........................................................................................9-4 9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled ............................................................................... 9-5 9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled ...............................................................................9-5 9.5 Tributary Retiming..........................................................................................................................................9-6 9.5.1 Retiming Principle..................................................................................................................................9-7 9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function....................................................................................................9-7
10 OAM.........................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Network Management.................................................................................................................................10-3 iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Contents
10.3 Security Management..................................................................................................................................10-3
11 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................11-1
11.1 Interface Types............................................................................................................................................11-3 11.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface........................................................................................................11-3 11.2.1 SDH Optical Interface........................................................................................................................11-3 11.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface..................................................................................................................11-9 11.2.3 ATM Optical Interface.....................................................................................................................11-10 11.2.4 Laser Safety Class............................................................................................................................11-11 11.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces.......................................................................................................11-12 11.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface..................................................................................................................11-12 11.3.2 DDN Interface..................................................................................................................................11-12 11.3.3 Auxiliary Interface...........................................................................................................................11-13 11.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance.....................................................................................11-15 11.4.1 Clock Interface Type........................................................................................................................11-15 11.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance.......................................................................................11-15 11.5 Transmission Performance........................................................................................................................11-15 11.6 Timeslot Numbering.................................................................................................................................11-16 11.7 Power Supply Specification......................................................................................................................11-16 11.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards..............................................................................................11-17 11.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................................11-20 11.10 Safety Certification.................................................................................................................................11-20 11.11 Environmental Specification...................................................................................................................11-21 11.12 Environment Requirement......................................................................................................................11-22 11.12.1 Environment for Storage................................................................................................................11-22 11.12.2 Environment for Transportation.....................................................................................................11-24 11.12.3 Environment for Operation............................................................................................................11-26
A Compliant Standards...............................................................................................................A-1
A.1 ITU-T Recommendations..............................................................................................................................A-2 A.2 IEEE Standards..............................................................................................................................................A-3 A.3 IETF Standards..............................................................................................................................................A-4 A.4 Environment Related Standards....................................................................................................................A-4
B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1 C Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................C-1 Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500..................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500....................................................................................1-3 Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used......................................................2-4 Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used.......................................................2-5 Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used..................................................2-5 Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used...................................................2-5 Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N1IXCSA/B board is used....................................................2-6 Figure 2-6 ROPA System...................................................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-7 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack....................................................2-15 Figure 2-8 Hybrid application of ADM and REG..............................................................................................2-16 Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment....................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet.........................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.........................................................................................3-5 Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack......................................................................................3-6 Figure 3-5 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500...................................................................................3-30 Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture...............................................................................................................4-5 Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port..................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-2 EPL service based on port+VLAN.....................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-3 EVPL service......................................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-4 EPLAN service.................................................................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-5 EVPLAN service..............................................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-6 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS..............................................................................5-12 Figure 5-7 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS....................................................................5-12 Figure 5-8 RPR ring...........................................................................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse......................................................................................................................................5-17 Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1........................................................................................5-18 Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different.........................................................................5-18 Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping........................................................................5-19 Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence.............................................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service....................................................................................................................5-20 Figure 5-15 Wrapping protection.......................................................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-16 Steering protection..........................................................................................................................5-21 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii
Figures
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Figure 5-17 Wrapping+steering protection........................................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-18 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services.......................................................................5-27 Figure 5-19 VP-Ring/VC-Ring..........................................................................................................................5-28 Figure 5-20 IMA service networking.................................................................................................................5-29 Figure 6-1 DCN networking.................................................................................................................................6-2 Figure 6-2 Positions of D bytes in SDH overheads..............................................................................................6-3 Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC.........................................................................................................6-5 Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)................................6-5 Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)..................................6-6 Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (IP)......................................6-7 Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (IP)....................................6-7 Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (OSI)...................................6-8 Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (OSI).................................6-9 Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links..........................................................................................................7-3 Figure 7-2 Management of control topology.......................................................................................................7-4 Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery.......................................................................................................................7-5 Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration.......................................................................................................7-6 Figure 7-5 Trail restoration..................................................................................................................................7-7 Figure 7-6 Diamond Services...............................................................................................................................7-9 Figure 7-7 Gold services....................................................................................................................................7-12 Figure 7-8 A silver service.................................................................................................................................7-14 Figure 7-9 Tunnel...............................................................................................................................................7-17 Figure 7-10 Lower cross-connnection................................................................................................................7-18 Figure 7-11 Service Association........................................................................................................................7-19 Figure 7-12 Traffic equilibrium.........................................................................................................................7-22 Figure 7-13 LCAS (different path).....................................................................................................................7-23 Figure 7-14 LCAS (same path)..........................................................................................................................7-23 Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail.........................8-12 Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection......................................................................................................8-13 Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking.........................................................................................................................8-14 Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure..................................................................8-14 Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure....................................................................8-15 Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings...................................................................................................8-16 Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection..................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP.................................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines.........................................................................8-17 Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate................................................................................8-18 Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR........................................................................................................8-18 Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection...............................................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection..................................................................................................................8-19 Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection.........................................................................................................8-20 Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled...........................................................................................9-5 viii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Figures
Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM........................................................................................................9-5 Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled...............................................................9-6 Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID...........................................................................................................9-6 Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram................................................................................................................9-7 Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming.....................................................................................9-8 Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming..........................................................................................9-8
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
ix
Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500................................................................................. 2-3 Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500................................................................2-8 Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................................................................2-9 Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................2-10 Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................................................................2-11 Table 2-6 Configuration of the extended subrack..............................................................................................2-15 Table 2-7 Boards that support the REG function...............................................................................................2-16 Table 2-8 Optical interfaces for the REG...........................................................................................................2-16 Table 2-9 Equipment level protection................................................................................................................2-17 Table 2-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................2-18 Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets..................................................................................... 3-3 Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards.........................3-7 Table 3-3 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................................... 3-7 Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack................................................................3-29 Table 3-5 Constituent boards and functions of each unit...................................................................................3-30 Table 3-6 SDH processing boards......................................................................................................................3-33 Table 3-7 PDH processing boards......................................................................................................................3-35 Table 3-8 DDN processing boards.....................................................................................................................3-36 Table 3-9 Data processing boards and their interfaces.......................................................................................3-37 Table 3-10 WDM boards and theri interfaces....................................................................................................3-39 Table 3-11 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces......................................................................3-39 Table 3-12 Auxiliary boards and theri interfaces...............................................................................................3-40 Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0...........................................................................................................5-2 Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2...........................................................................................................................5-3 Table 5-3 Function list of N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A............................................................................5-5 Table 5-4 Function list of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4...............................................................................................5-5 Table 5-5 Function list of RPR boards...............................................................................................................5-15 Table 5-6 RPR service class...............................................................................................................................5-16 Table 5-7 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1..........................................................................................................5-23 Table 5-8 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1.............................................................................................................5-24 Table 5-9 ATM service types and traffic types..................................................................................................5-26 Table 5-10 Classification of ATM protection....................................................................................................5-29 Table 5-11 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4...........................................................................5-30 Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi
Tables
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description Table 5-12 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA...........................................................5-31 Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500..................................................................................6-4 Table 7-1 Service level.........................................................................................................................................7-7 Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services.........................................................................................................7-8 Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services..............................................................................7-9 Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service...............................................................................7-10 Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service........................................................................7-11 Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services.................................................................................................................7-13 Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services................................................................................................................7-14 Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services..............................................................................................................7-16 Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services..................................................................................................................7-16 Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels.........................................................................................................................7-18 Table 7-11 Attributes of service association......................................................................................................7-19 Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes.................................................................................................7-21 Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards....................................................................................8-3 Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters...................................................................................................................8-3 Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units......................................................8-4 Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit........................................................................................8-4 Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4.........................................................................8-5 Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards..........................................................................................8-5 Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX..............................................................................8-6 Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters........................................................................................................................8-8 Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.................................................8-9 Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters........................................................................................................................8-10 Table 8-11 SNCP parameters.............................................................................................................................8-12 Table 11-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................................................11-3 Table 11-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................11-4 Table 11-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................11-4 Table 11-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................11-5 Table 11-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................11-5 Table 11-6 Specifications of the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................11-6 Table 11-7 Specifications of the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................11-7 Table 11-8 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces......................................11-8 Table 11-9 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................11-9 Table 11-10 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces................................................................................11-10 Table 11-11 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................11-10 Table 11-12 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................11-11 Table 11-13 Laser safety class..........................................................................................................................11-11 Table 11-14 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces..................................................................................11-12 Table 11-15 DDN interface types.....................................................................................................................11-13 Table 11-16 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface.......................................................................................11-13 Table 11-17 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces.......................................................................................11-14
xii
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Tables
Table 11-18 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces.......................................................................................11-14 Table 11-19 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface...........................................................................11-14 Table 11-20 Clock features...............................................................................................................................11-15 Table 11-21 Timing and synchronization performance....................................................................................11-15 Table 11-22 Transmission performance...........................................................................................................11-16 Table 11-23 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)....................................................................................11-16 Table 11-24 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)..................................................................................11-16 Table 11-25 Power supply specifications.........................................................................................................11-16 Table 11-26 Power consumption and weight of boards...................................................................................11-17 Table 11-27 EMC test results...........................................................................................................................11-20 Table 11-28 Safety certifications......................................................................................................................11-21 Table 11-29 Environment specifications for long-term operation...................................................................11-22 Table 11-30 Climate requirements for storage.................................................................................................11-22 Table 11-31 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage......................................11-23 Table 11-32 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage..........................................11-24 Table 11-33 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage.....................................................................11-24 Table 11-34 Climate requirements for transportation......................................................................................11-25 Table 11-35 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation...........................11-25 Table 11-36 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation...............................11-26 Table 11-37 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation..........................................................11-26 Table 11-38 Requirements for temperature and humidity................................................................................11-26 Table 11-39 Other climate requirements..........................................................................................................11-27 Table 11-40 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance...............................................11-27 Table 11-41 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation......................................11-28 Table 11-42 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation.................................................................11-28 Table A-1 IUT-T recommendations....................................................................................................................A-2 Table A-2 IEEE standards...................................................................................................................................A-3 Table A-3 IETF standards...................................................................................................................................A-4 Table A-4 Environment related standards...........................................................................................................A-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
xiii
About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document describes the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of network application, functions, hardware and software structure, and features.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX OSN 3500 Version V100R007
Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l l l l
Policy planning Installation and Commissioning engineer NM configuration engineer Technical support engineer
Organization
This document is organized as follows. Chapter 1 Network Application Description Describes the OptiX OSN 3500 and its position in the network.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
About This Document
Chapter 2 Function
Description This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of capacity, interface, built-in WDM technology, ROP system, REG, protection, TCM and network management. Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptable cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 3500. Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 3500. It includes intelligent software, board software, NE software and NM software. Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of function, application and protection. This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of service classes and application. Describes protection modes (including equipment level and network level) and characteristics supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX OSN 3500. This chapter describes main technical characteristics of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of safe operation, maintenance and centralised management. This chapter describes the interface specifications, transmission performance and environment requirements for the OptiX OSN 3500. This appendix lists international standards to which the OptiX OSN 3500 conforms in terms of design and performance. This appendix lists the terms used in this document. The appendix lists the acronyms used in this document.
3 Hardware 4 Software
5 Data Features
6 DCN Features 7 ASON Features 8 Protection
9 Clock 10 OAM
11 Technical Specifications
A Compliant Standards
B Glossary C Acronyms and Abbreviations
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
About This Document
Symbol
Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
WARNING
CAUTION
TIP
NOTE
General Conventions
Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... } * Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italic. Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected. Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
About This Document
GUI Conventions
Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation
Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressingCtrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation
Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Update History
This document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R006, this version has the following new or optimized content:
l
Description of the N1SLD64, N1SLD16, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4 is added. Sections of the new features are added.

Section 2.7 "Intelligent Optical Power Adjustment" Section 2.8 "External Clock Output Shutdown Function" Section 2.17 "Software Package Loading" Section 2.18 "Hot Fix" Section 2.19 "Inter-Board Alarm Suppression" Section 2.10 "PRBS Function" Section 2.21 "Board Version Replacement"
Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
1 Network Application
1
l l l l l l l l
Network Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 is mainly used at the convergence layer and the backbone layer of an MAN transmission network. The OptiX OSN 3500 is new generation equipment developed by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Huawei). The OptiX OSN 3500 integrates the following technologies: Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) Ethernet Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) Storage area network (SAN) Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) Digital data network (DDN) Automatically switched optical network (ASON)
The OptiX OSN 3500 transmits voice and data services on the same platform with high efficiency. Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
1-1
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 3500 can also be networked with the following equipment to optimize the investment and to lower the networking costs for customers. The OptiX OSN 3500 can be networked with the following equipment:
l l l l l l
OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 7500 OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG OptiX OSN 1500
Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 3500 in a transmission network.
1-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 9500 OptiX OSN 7500 Backbone layer OptiX OSN 3500T OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 3500 Convergence layer OptiX OSN 1500 OptiX OSN 2500 Access layer
GSM/CDMA
PSTN
Ethernet
...
ATM
SAN
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN) Storage Area Network (SAN) Ethernet
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
1-3
2 Function
2
About This Chapter
The equipment has many functions. 2.1 Capacity The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and access capacity.
Function
2.2 Service The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services. 2.3 Interface The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces. 2.4 Networking The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring network and the chain network. 2.5 Built-in WDM Technology The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber. 2.6 ROPA System The equipment supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals in a long distance. 2.7 Intelligent Power Adjustment The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function. 2.8 External Clock Output Shutdown Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the external clock output shutdown function. 2.9 Extended Subrack The OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services and 24 x E3/T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N8) TPS protection for E1/T1 services and 1:N (N3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services. 2.10 Board REG Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the board REG function. 2.11 Protection
Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1
2 Function
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection. 2.12 ASON Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources. 2.13 TCM The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors. 2.14 E13/M13 Function The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16E1/21T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16E1/21T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the E13/M13 function. 2.15 RPR The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or a link failure. 2.16 ETH-OAM With the development of Ethernet services, the equipment maintainability becomes more and more important. 2.17 Software Package Loading The software package loading is performed to upgrade and manage the NE-level software in a mass manner. The NE-level software then can be loaded and activated in a mass manner to simplify the operations to upgrade the NE-level software. Also, you can check if the board software versions match when the board is in service. Once a board is in service, the board software versions can be automatically updated. 2.18 Hot Fix The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot fix technology. 2.19 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board. 2.20 PRBS Function The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function. 2.21 Board Version Replacement The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with those of the old version board. 2.22 OAM Information Interworking OptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking. 2.23 Clock The OptiX OSN equipment supports the clock functions.
2-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2 Function
2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and access capacity. 2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity The OptiX OSN 3500 provides cross-connect boards of different cross-connect capacities. 2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity With different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 3500 provides different access capacities.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides cross-connect boards of different cross-connect capacities. The following cross-connect boards can be used for the OptiX OSN 3500:
l l l
The N1GXCSA board, which is a general cross-connect and timing board. The N1EXCSA board, which is an enhanced cross-connect and timing board. The N1UXCSA/N1UXCSB and the N1SXCSA/N1SXCSB boards, which are greatly enhanced cross-connect and timing boards. The N1IXCSA/N1XCSB board, which is an infinitely enhanced cross-connect and timing board. The N1XCE board, which is a lower order cross-connect board for the extended subrack.
Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect capacity of each cross-connect board for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 Board Higher Order CrossConnect Capacity 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4) 80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4) 80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4) Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity Access Capacity Remarks
N1GXCSA
5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4) 5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4)
35 Gbit/s (224 x 224 VC-4) 58.75 Gbit/s (376 x 376 VC-4) 58.75 Gbit/s (376 x 376 VC-4)
Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack.
N1EXCSA
N1UXCSA
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4)
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2-3
2 Function
Board
Higher Order CrossConnect Capacity 80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4) 200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4) 200 Gbit/s (1280 x 1280 VC-4)
Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity
Access Capacity
Remarks
N1UXCSB
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4)
60 Gbit/s (384 x 384 VC-4) 155 Gbit/s (992 x 992 VC-4) 156.25 Gbit/s (1000 x 1000 VC-4) 155 Gbit/s (992 x 992 VC-4) 156.25 Gbit/s (1000 x 1000 VC-4) 1.25 Gbit/ s (8 x 8 VC-4)
Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and not for connection to the extended subrack. Used for the main subrack and for connection to the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack. Used for the extended subrack.
N1SXCSA
N1SXCSB
N1IXCSA
N1IXCSB
XCE
1.25 Gbit/s (8 x 8 VC-4)
2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity

With different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 3500 provides different access capacities. For details, see Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5. Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5
622Mbit/s
FAN S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8
10Gbit/s
FAN S L O T 1 1
10Gbit/s
S L O T 9
N1GXCSA
S L O T 1 0
N1GXCSA
S L O T 1 2
S L O T 1 3
S L O T 1 4
S L O T 1 5
S L O T 1 6
622Mbit/s
S L O T 1 7
S L O T 1 8
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s
Fiber Routing
2-4
GSCC GSCC
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2 Function
Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9
N1EXCSA
FAN S L O T 1 0
N1EXCSA
FAN S L O T 1 1
10Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
1.25Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s
GSCC
S L O T 1 2
S L O T 1 3
S L O T 1 4
S L O T 1 5
S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8 or
GSCC
Fiber routing
Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used
FAN S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9
N1UXCSA/B
FAN S L O T 1 0
N1UXCSA/B
FAN S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4 S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8 or
GSCC GSCC
1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s
Fiber routing
Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used
FAN
S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9
FAN
S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4
N1SXCSA/B
Fiber routing
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
N1SXCSA/B
20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s or GSCC GSCC
5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s
2.5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
FAN
S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8
2-5
2 Function
Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N1IXCSA/B board is used
FAN
S L O T 1 S L O T 2 S L O T 3 S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8 S L O T 9
FAN
S L O T 1 0 S L O T 1 1 S L O T 1 2 S L O T 1 3 S L O T 1 4
FAN
S L O T 1 5 S S S L 1 L O 7 O T T 1 1 6 8
N1IXCSA/B
Fiber routing
2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services. 2.2.1 SDH Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process SDH services. 2.2.2 PDH Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process PDH services. 2.2.3 Ethernet Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process Ethernet services. 2.2.4 RPR Services The OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet ring (RPR). 2.2.5 ATM Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process ATM services. 2.2.6 DDN Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process DDN services. 2.2.7 SAN Services The OptiX OSN 3500 can process SAN services. 2.2.8 Service Access Capacity The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies with the type and quantity of the configured boards.
2.2.1 SDH Services

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process SDH services. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following SDH services:
l l l
Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16/64 Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c SDH services with FEC: 10.609 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s
2-6
N1IXCSA/B
20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s or GSCC GSCC
5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s
10Gbit/s 20Gbit/s 20Gbit/s
2 Function
2.2.2 PDH Services

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process PDH services. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following PDH services:
l l l
E1/T1 service E3/T3 service E4 service
2.2.3 Ethernet Services

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process Ethernet services. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces to process the following Ethernet services:
l l l l
Ethernet private line (EPL) service Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
2.2.4 RPR Services

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet ring (RPR). The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following RPR services:
l l
EVPL service EVPLAN service
2.2.5 ATM Services

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process ATM services. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following ATM services:
l l l l
Constant bit rate (CBR) service Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
2.2.6 DDN Services

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process DDN services. The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following DDN services:
l l
N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service Framed E1 service
2.2.7 SAN Services

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process SAN services.
2 Function
Using four independent multiservice access ports, the OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following SAN services:
l l l l
Fiber channel (FC) service Fiber connection (FICON) service Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service
2.2.8 Service Access Capacity

The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies with the type and quantity of the configured boards. Table 2-2 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 for accessing different services. The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported, when only one specific type of service is accessed. Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 Service Type STM-64 standard or concatenated services STM-64 (FEC) services STM-16 standard or concatenated services STM-16 (FEC) services STM-4 standard or concatenated services STM-1 standard services STM-1 (electrical) services E4 services E3/T3 services E1/T1 services FE services GE services STM-4 ATM services STM-1 ATM services N x 64 kbit/s (N: 131) services Framed E1 services ESCON services FICON/FC100 services
2-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack 8 4 44 8 46 204 132 32 117 504 180 56 15 60 64 64 44 22
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2 Function
Service Type FC200 services DVB-ASI services
Maximum Number of Services Supported by a Single Subrack 8 44
2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces. 2.3.1 Service Interfaces Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces. 2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces. Table 2-3 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface SDH service interface Description STM-1 electrical interfaces: BNC connectors STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz. PDH service interface 75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors 75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: BNC connectors Ethernet service interface DDN service interface 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX RS232, RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2-9
2 Function
Interface ATM service interface
Description STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3/ N1PL3/PL3A board IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1
Storage area network (SAN) service interface
FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces
NOTE
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technical specifications defined by Huawei.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces. Table 2-4 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface Type Administration Description One remote maintenance interface (OAM) Four broadcast data interfaces (S1S4) One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1) One Ethernet interface for network management (ETH) One administration serial interface (F&f) One extended subrack administration interface (EXT) One commissioning interface (COM) Orderwire interface One orderwire phone interface (PHONE) Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2) Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (used with two serial interfaces for transparent transmission of asynchronous data) Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Alarm interface 16 alarm input and four alarm output interface Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces Alarm concatenation input interface
2-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2 Function
2.4 Networking
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring network and the chain network. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports both separate and hybrid configuration of the following types of NEs:
l l l
Terminal multiplexer (TM) Add/drop multiplexer (ADM) Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 3500 is interconnected to other equipment, the paths for transmitting and receiving the K byte should be consistent.
l
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used with other OptiX OSN equipment to provide a complete ASON solution. Such a solution covers all layers including the backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer. Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX 3500 can be interconnected to WDM equipment. Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected to the OptiX Metro equipment.
Table 2-5 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 3500 Networking Mode 1 2 Chain Ring Topology
Tangent rings
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2-11
2 Function
Networking Mode 4 Intersecting rings
Topology
Ring with chain
DNI
Hub
Mesh
Legends:
MADM
ADM
TM
ASON NE
2-12
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2 Function
2.5 Built-in WDM Technology

The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of several wavelengths in one fiber. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the built-in WDM technology, whose functions are described as follows.
l
Any two adjacent standard wavelengths (with 100-GHz spacing) that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 can be added or dropped, with the operating wavelength ranging from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm. The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) station that adds or drops two/four wavelengths is supported. The optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station that adds or drops two wavelengths is supported. The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, signals are all transparently transmitted. Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized. The add/drop carrier wavelengths can be labeled and queried. The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). For these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate can be monitored. Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms. Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1 inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms. Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which then can be multiplexed or demultiplexed.
l l
2.6 ROPA System

The equipment supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals in a long distance. The transmission distance of optical signals is extended if the ROPA system is used in the OptiX OSN 3500 system. The ROPA system consists of the BA optical amplifier board, ROP board, and filter isolating board (FIB). The ROP board receives optical signals from the line side, and sends them to the FIB board for filtering and isolation. The optical signals are then sent to the SF16 board. The transmission and amplification of the optical signals are then completed. Figure 2-6 shows a typical ROPA system.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2-13
2 Function
Figure 2-6 ROPA System
SF16 SF16
BA17 BA G.652 fiber
Erbium G.652 fiber
ROP
FIB
SF16 SF16
2.7 Intelligent Power Adjustment

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the IPA function. The IPA function is used to shut down the pump laser when the receiving side of the line board detects no input of signals. Therefore, the damage to eyes by too much laser power is avoided. In a transmission system, the optical signals in optical paths may be lost because of a fiber cut, equipment degrade or connector disconnection. To prevent the damage to human bodies, especially eyes, the system provides the IPA function. When the optical signals in the one or several optical trunk sections of the main optical path are lost, the system detects the signal loss and shuts down the uplink optical amplifier. Several seconds later, the laser of the downlink optical amplifier is also shut down. When the optical signals recover, the optical amplifier resumes working.
2.8 External Clock Output Shutdown Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the external clock output shutdown function. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function of external clock output shutdown. Users can use the T2000 to issue a command to the cross-connect board to shut down or recover the two external T4 external clock outputs. Moreover, the current configuration status of the NE software can also be queried. When the function is performed, no external clock signals are output. In addition, the software cannot automatically recover the clock output unless the T2000 issues a command to disable the function. By default, the external clock output shutdown function is not enabled. In other words, external clock signals are output by default.
2.9 Extended Subrack

The OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services and 24 x E3/T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N8) TPS protection for E1/T1 services and 1:N (N3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services. Each OptiX OSN 3500 subrack supports only one extended subrack. Table 2-6 lists the configuration of the extended subrack.
2-14
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2 Function
Table 2-6 Configuration of the extended subrack Subrack Cross-connect and timing board SCC Service processing board Primary Subrack Extended Subrack
The N1UXCSB, N1SXCSB or The N1XCE board is required.1+1 N1IXCSB board is required.1+1 hot backup is recommended. hot backup is recommended. The N3GSCC board is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. Service processing boards are configured according to the actual demands. The SCC board needs not be configured. Support N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N1D75S, N1D12S, N1D12B, N1PL3, N1PD3, N1PL3A, N1C34S, N1D34S, N1TSB8, N1TSB4, N1LWX, BA2, BPA, N1DCU, N2DCU. It is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. It is required. It is required.
N1PIU N1AUX FAN
This board is required. 1+1 hot backup is recommended. This board is required. This board is required.
The N1UXCSB board of the main subrack and the N1XCE board of the extended subrack are connected by two cables to achieve 1+1 protection. The EXT interface on the N1AUX board of the main subrack is connected to the "EXT" interface of the N1AUX board of the extended subrack to transmit the network management information. When the N1AUX board is used in an extended subrack, the J9 jumper cap of the N1AUX board should be removed. Figure 2-7 shows the connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack. If the N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board is used, cables are connected in the same way. Just replace the N1UXCSB board in Figure 2-7 with the N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board. Figure 2-7 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack
19 20 21 2223 2425 26 27 28 29 3031 3233 3435 36 37
EXT
19 2021 2223 2425 26 27
28 29 3031 3233 34 35 36 37
EXT
AUX
FAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FAN
FAN 1112 13 14 1516 17 18

GSCC GSCC
FAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FAN 10
FAN 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
UXCSB
10
UXCSB
XCE
EXB EXA
EXB EXA
EXB EXA
EXB EXA
XCE
Primary subrack
Extended subrack
2.10 Board REG Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the board REG function.
AUX
PIU
PIU
PIU
PIU
2 Function
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of ADM and REG. See Figure 2-8. Figure 2-8 Hybrid application of ADM and REG
REG SL64
IN
SL64
OUT
SL64
OUT
SL64
IN
OSN 3500
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500

IN OUT OUT IN
OSN 3500
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
OSN 3500
PQ1 SL16 SL16 SL16 SL16
ADM
Table 2-7 lists the boards that support the REG function. Table 2-8 lists the types of optical interfaces that are supported. Table 2-7 Boards that support the REG function Board Slot (40 Gbit/s Cross-Connect Capacity) Slots 8, 11 Slots 68, 1113 Slots 8, 11 Slots 68, 1113 Slots 68, 1113 Slot (80 Gbit/s Cross-Connect Capacity) Slots 78, 1112 Slots 58, 1114 Slots 78,1112 Slots 58, 1114 Slots 58, 1114 Description
N1SL64,N2SL64 N1SF16 N1SF64 N2SL16, N3SL16 N3SL16A
The T2000 must be used to enable the REG mode of boards. With the REG mode enabled, the board is in the RS loopback mode and only processes the regeneration section overhead and the frame header.
Table 2-8 Optical interfaces for the REG Board N1SL64, N2SL64 N1SF64 N1SF16 N2SL16 N3SL16 Optical Interface Type I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
2-16
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2 Function
Board N3SL16A
Optical Interface Type I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
2.11 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection. 2.11.1 Equipment Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes. 2.11.2 Network Level Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes.
2.11.1 Equipment Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes. Table 2-9 shows the equipment level protection provided by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-9 Equipment level protection Object Protected E1/T1 service processing board E3/T3/E4/STM-1(e) service processing board DDN service processing board Ethernet processing boards N2EFS0 and N4EFS0 Ethernet processing board N1EMS4 Ethernet processing board N1EGS4 ATM service processing board Cross-connect and timing unit SCC board Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board N1LWX 48 V power interface unit Protection Scheme 1:N (N8) TPS 1:N (N3) TPS 1:N (N8) TPS 1:1 TPS 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS 1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup 1+1 hot backup Intra-board protection (dual-fed and selective receiving) and inter-board protection (1+1 hot backup) 1+1 hot backup Revertive Mode Revertive Revertive Revertive Revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive Non-revertive
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2-17
2 Function
Object Protected
Protection Scheme
Revertive Mode
NOTE The OptiX OSN 3500 supports coexistence of three TPS protection groups of different types. With the extended subrack, the OptiX OSN 3500 can support coexistence of six TPS protection groups of different types.
2.11.2 Network Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes. Table 2-10 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 2-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Network Level Protection SDH protection Protection Scheme Linear MSP MSP ring Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP) Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection Fiber-shared virtual trail protection Optical-path-shared MSP Ethernet protection ATM protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
2.12 ASON Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources. The ASON features help the OptiX OSN 3500 to:
l l l l
Support automatic end-to-end service configuration. Support service level agreement (SLA). Support mesh networking and protection. Provide traffic engineering control to guarantee load-balance traffic network wide and improve the bandwidth availability. Provide distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and preconfiguration. Support span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the scalability of the network.
2-18
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

NOTE
2 Function
The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 3500 as required. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX OSN 3500 will not support the intelligent features described in this manual.
2.13 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors. If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the bit errors of each section. The N2SLO1, N2SL1, N2SLQ1, N2SL4, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N2SL16, N2SL64, N3SL16 and N3SL16A boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.
2.14 E13/M13 Function

The E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16E1/21T1 signals into one E3/T3 signal or to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16E1/21T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the E13/M13 function. The E13/M13 function has two modes: Transmux and Transmux Server. These two modes are described in detail as follows:
l
The remote NE transmits the E1/E3 or T1/T3 services in VC-12/VC-3 granularities to the central NE over the SDH line. The central NE disassembles the received services into E1/T1 granularities.

For E1/T1 services, the central NE directly demaps VC-12 signals into E1/T1 signals. For E3/T3 services, the central NE first demaps VC-3 signals into E3/T3 signals. The E13/M13 function is then performed to demultiplex E3/T3 signals into E1/T1 signals.
The central NE first grooms E1/T1 signals, and then by using the E13/M13 function, aggregates and reassembles these E1/T1 signals to E3/T3 signals. The E3/T3 signals are then output.
If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to local application equipment through electrical interfaces, the mode is referred to as the Transmux mode. If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to other transmission equipment over the SDH line, the mode is referred to as the Transmux Server mode.
2.15 RPR
The RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut or a link failure. The RPR has the following main features:
l l l
Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time. Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels. Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the destination node.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-19
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2 Function
l l
Solve the fairness and congestion control problems. Provide RPR protection.
2.16 ETH-OAM
With the development of Ethernet services, the equipment maintainability becomes more and more important. When Ethernet is extended to the metropolitan area network (MAN) and the wide area network (WAN), the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) of the transmission network becomes a key issue. This brings the emergence of the Ethernet OAM. The Ethernet OAM has the following functions:
l l l
Automatic fault discovery Fault location Fault isolation
The Ethernet OAM is realized through the following methods:

l l l
The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check. The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point. The continuity check, which is used for a unidirectional continuity check.
The Ethernet OAM is implemented in the following process. The maintenance end point (MEP) initiates the fault detection. When detecting the fault, the maintenance intermediate point (MIP) reports alarms, which can be accurately synchronized to the Ethernet trail that is relevant to the MIP.
2.17 Software Package Loading

The software package loading is performed to upgrade and manage the NE-level software in a mass manner. The NE-level software then can be loaded and activated in a mass manner to simplify the operations to upgrade the NE-level software. Also, you can check if the board software versions match when the board is in service. Once a board is in service, the board software versions can be automatically updated. The software package loading has the following features:
l l
Users load the software in a uniform operation interface. The complete software package is stored on the N3GSCC board. The NE software is directly placed in the target directory while the board software is buffered in the CF. In this way, the board software can be automatically updated after a new board is inserted. If the board software files are lost, these files can be restored from the N3GSCC board. The NE can be automatically managed. If the board that is newly inserted does not match the software of the NE, an auto-update is performed. The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load only the required files.
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:


l l l l
2 Function
Upgrade of software of an NE Replacement of service boards Replacement of the SCC board Replacement of the CF card of a board
2.18 Hot Fix

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot fix technology. Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is found or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to fix the defect or realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot fix. The hot fix technology has the following features:
l l
The hot fix solves most software problems without affecting services. The hot fix effectively decreases the number of software versions and avoids frequent software version upgrade. The hot fix operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot fix also provides a rollback function. All these help to lower the upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks. The hot fix can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves the efficiency of solving problems.
2.19 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised as a result of the alarms on the line board. When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board, many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem. If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE, and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on the tributary/data board are suppressed. If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the T2000 and are not be mistakenly suppressed.
2.20 PRBS Function

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function. The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service path is faulty. Such
2 Function
analysis can be performed for both the NE itself and the entire network. During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a real test device. The PRBS function has the following two types:
l
If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a tributary board. If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:

l
For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback command on the T2000. On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this path. The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts the statistics. The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result. The user queries the PRBS statistics result. The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.
l l
l l l
2.21 Board Version Replacement

The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board are consistent with those of the old version board. This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus lowers the equipment cost and the maintenance cost. Currently for OptiX OSN 3500, the board version replacement function is supported by the N1SXCSA, N1SXCSB, N1SL64, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N2EGS2 and N2EFS4. For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting. When using the board version replacement function, note the following two points:
l
The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the replacement, fully consider the difference of the two boards in functions. For example, If the N2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be replaced with the N1SL64 board. The line board to be replaced cannot have optical-path-shared MSP configured.
2.22 OAM Information Interworking

OptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking. Any of the following three methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 3500 to transparently transmit the OAM information of third-party equipment, or for the third-party equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 3500.

l l l
2 Function
HWECC IP over DCC OSI over DCC
2.23 Clock
The OptiX OSN equipment supports the clock functions. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following clock functions:
l l l l l l
SSM clock protocol Tributary retiming Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input Line clock source Tributary clock source Three working modes

Tracing mode Hold-over mode Free-run mode
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
2-23
3 Hardware
3
About This Chapter
3.3 Subrack The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured. 3.4 Boards The equipment supports different types of boards.
Hardware
3.1 Overview The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards. 3.2 Cabinet The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power supply box is on the top of the cabinet to access 48 V or 60 V power.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-1
3 Hardware
3.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards. Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
Cabinet
Subrack
Board
3.2 Cabinet
The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A power supply box is on the top of the cabinet to access 48 V or 60 V power.
3 Hardware
Figure 3-2 shows an ETSI cabinet that is 300 mm deep. Figure 3-2 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet
H W D
Table 3-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets. Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets Dimensions (mm) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Weight (kg) 55 79 60 84
Allowed Subrack Quantity 1 1 2 2

3-3
3 Hardware
Dimensions (mm) 600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H)
Weight (kg) 70 94
Allowed Subrack Quantity 2 2
NOTE All dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the directions of the width, the depth and the height.
H W D
3.3 Subrack
The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured. 3.3.1 Subrack Structure The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, fan area and fiber routing area. 3.3.2 Slot Allocation The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper tier, where 19 slots are present, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots are present, is the slot area for processing boards. 3.3.3 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of the subrack cover the subrack dimensions and weight.
3.3.1 Subrack Structure

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot area for processing boards, slot area for interface boards, fan area and fiber routing area. Figure 3-3 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
3-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
2 3
H W D
1. Slot area for interface boards
2. Fan area 3. Slot area for processing boards
4. Fiber routing area
The functions of these areas are as follows.

l
Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the interface boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Fan area: This area is used to house three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated by the equipment. Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the processing boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers in the subrack.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation

The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper tier, where 19 slots are present, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slots are present, is the slot area for processing boards. Figure 3-4 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-5
3 Hardware
Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

S L O T 1 9 S L O T 2 0 S L O T 2 1 S L O T 2 2 S L O T 2 3 S L O T 2 4 S L O T 2 5 S L O T 2 6 S L O T 2 7 S L O T 2 8 S L O T 2 9 S L O T 3 0 S L O T 3 1 S L O T 3 2 S L O T 3 3 S L O T 3 4 S L O T 3 5 S L O T 3 6 S L O T 3 7
P I U
P I U
A U X
SLOT
FAN 38
S L O T 4 S L O T 5 S L O T 6 S L O T 7 S L O T 8
FAN
SLOT 39
SLOT
FAN 40
S L O T 1 5 S L O T 1 6 S L O T 1 7 G S C C S L O T 1 8 G S C C
S L O T 1
S L O T 2
S L O T 3
S L O T 9
S L O T 1 0
S L O T 1 1
S L O T 1 2
S L O T 1 3
S L O T 1 4
X C S
X C S
Fiber Routing
Slot Area for Interface Boards

Slots for interface boards: slots 1926 and 2936
Slot Area for Processing Boards

Slots for processing boards: slots 18 and 1117
Other Slots
l l l l l
Slots for cross-connect and timing boards: slots 910 Slots for SCC boards: slots 1718 (slot 17 can also house a processing board) Slots for PIU boards: slots 2728 Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 37 Slots for fan boards: slots 3840
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing Boards
Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards.
3-6
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards Slots for Processing Boards Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 13 Slot 15 Slots for Interface Boards Slots 19 and 20 Slots 23 and 24 Slots 29 and 30 Slots 33 and 34 Slots for Processing Boards Slot 3 Slot 5 Slot 14 Slot 16 Slots for Interface Boards Slots 21 and 22 Slots 25 and 26 Slots 31 and 32 Slots 35 and 36
Boards and Their Valid Slots

Table 3-3 lists the boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-3 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 Board N1GXCSA N1EXCSA N1UXCSA N1UXCSB N1SXCSA N1SXCSB N1XCE Full Name Cross-connect and timing board Enhanced cross-connect and timing board Greatly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Greatly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Greatly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Greatly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Lower order cross-connect and timing board for the extended subrack SCC board SCC board Infinitetly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Infinitetly enhanced crossconnect and timing board Valid Slots Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 910 Slots 5960
N1GSCC N3GSCC N1IXCSA N1IXCSB
Slots 1718 Slots 1718 Slots 910 Slots 910
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-7
3 Hardware
Board N1SL64
Full Name 1 x STM-64 optical interface board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 11 12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11
N2SL64
1 x STM-64 optical interface board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 11 12 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11
N1SF64
1 x STM-64 optical interface board (with FEC)
N1SLD64
2 x STM-64 optical interface board 1 x STM-16 optical interface board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 78 and 1112 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 1114 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 11 14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 68 and 11 13
N3SL16A
3-8
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1SL16
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 1114 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 11 14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 68 and 11 13
N2SL16
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 1114 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 11 14 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 68 and 11 13
N3SL16
N1SF16
1 x STM-16 optical interface board (with FEC)
N1SLD16
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-9
3 Hardware
Board N1SLQ4
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 15 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, one optical interface can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, four optical interfaces can be configured)
N2SLQ4
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 15 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, four optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, one optical interface can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, four optical interfaces can be configured)
3-10
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1SLD4
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, one optical interface can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, two optical interfaces can be configured)
N2SLD4
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, one optical interface can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, two optical interfaces can be configured)
N1SL4
N2SL4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-11
3 Hardware
Board N1SLT1
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, 18 optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, 112 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 15 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, 18 optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, 112 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, 14 optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, 112 optical interfaces can be configured)
N1SLQ1
N2SLQ1
3-12
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1SL1
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 16
N2SL1
N1SLH1
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (for the board housed in any of slots 25 and 1316, 16 optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (for the board housed in any of slots 14 and 1516, two optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 58 and 1114 (for the board housed in any of slots 58 and 1114, four optical interfaces can be configured) Slots 16 and 1316
N2SLQ16
N1SEP1
2 x STM-1 line processing board (without the interface board) 8 x STM-1 line processing board (with the interface board) 8 x STM-1 electrical interface board
N1SEP N1EU08
Slots 25 and 1316 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1926 and 2936 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
N1EU04
4 x STM-1 electrical interface board
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-13
3 Hardware
Board N1OU08 (LC)
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1926 and 2936 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
N2OU08 (SC)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1926 and 2936 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
N1TSB8
8-channel electrical interface switching board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35, 36, 69, and 85 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35, 36, 69, and 85 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35 and 36
N1TSB4 N2SLO1
4-channel electrical interface switching board 8 x STM-1 optical interface board
Slots 19 and 35 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (for the board housed in any of slots 18 and 1117, eight optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 (for the board housed in any of slots 18 and 1117, eight optical interfaces can be configured) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (for the board housed in any of slots 15 and 1416, four optical interfaces can be configured), and slots 68 and 1113 (for the board housed in any of slots 68 and 1113, eight optical interfaces can be configured)
3-14
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1PQ1A
Full Name 63 x E1 75-ohm processing board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 13 16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 13 16
N1PQ1B
63 x E1 120-ohm processing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 13 16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 13 16
N1MU04 N1PL3
4 x E4/STM-1 electrical interface board 3 x E3/T3 processing board
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25, 13 16, 5255, and 6366 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25, 1316, 5255, and 6366 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 13 16
N2PL3
3 x E3/T3 processing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25, 13 16, 5255, and 6366 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25, 1316, 5255, and 6366 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 13 16
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-15
3 Hardware
Board N1PD3
Full Name 6 x E3/T3 processing board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25, 13 16, 5255, and 6366 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25, 1316, 5255, and 6366 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 13 16
N2PD3
N2PQ3 N1PL3A
12 x E3/T3 processing board 3 x E3/T3 processing board (without the interface board)
Slots 25 and 1316 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 11 17, 5155, and 6366 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117, 5155, and 6366 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 16
N2PL3A
3 x E3/T3 processing board (without the interface board)
N1SPQ4
4 x E1/STM-1 processing board
Slots 25 and 1316
3-16
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1C34S
Full Name 3 x E3/T3 electrical interface switching board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35, 69, 71, 73, 75, 79, 81, 83, and 85 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35, 69, 71, 73, 75, 79, 81, 83, and 85 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
N1D34S
6 x E3/T3 electrical interface switching board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1926, 29 36, 6976, and 7986 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1926, 29 36, 6976, and 7986 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1926 and 2936
N2PQ1
63 x E1 processing board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 1316 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 13 16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots 5155 and 6366) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 13 16
N1PQM
N2SPQ4
4 x E4/STM-1 processing board
Slots 25 and 1316
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-17
3 Hardware
Board N1D75S
Full Name 32 x E1 electrical interface switching board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1926, 29 36, 6976, and 7986 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1926, 29 36, 6976, and 7986 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1926 and 2936
N1D12S
N1D12B
N1EGT2
2 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 15 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 58 and 11 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 11 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EFT8 (without the interface board)
8 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board
Slots 16 and 1316 (622 Mbit/s)
3-18
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1EFT8 (with the interface board)
Full Name 8 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission board
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 13 16 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slot 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFF8 N1ETF8 N1EFT8A
8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board 8 x FE transparent transmission board (without the interface board) 2 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Slots 1926 and 2936 Slots 1926 and 2936 Slots 18 and 1116 (622 Mbit/s)
N1EGS2
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 58 and 11 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 68 and 11 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EGS2
2 x GE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-19
3 Hardware
Board N1EFS4
Full Name 4 x FE Ethernet board with Lanswitch
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 16 (622 Mbit/s)
N2EFS4
4 x FE processing board (without the interface board)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 11 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1EFS0 N2EFS0
8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch 8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Slots 25 and 1316 (622 Mbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 13 16 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/ s)
N4EFS0
8 x FE Ethernet processing board with Lanswitch
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 1316 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 13 16 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/ s)
N1ETS8
8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board
Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35
3-20
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1EMS4 (with the interface board)
Full Name 4 x GE and 16 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board (with the interface board)
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 15 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/ s)
N1EMS4 (without the interface board)
4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board (without the interface board)
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 56 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 15 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 56 and 13 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EGS4
4 x GE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-21
3 Hardware
Board N1EMR0 (with the interface board)
Full Name 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 15 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/ s)
N1EMR0 (without the interface board)
1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 56 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 15 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 56 and 13 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EMR0 (with the interface board)
1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 24 and 15 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 25 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/ s)
3-22
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N2EMR0 (without the interface board)
Full Name 1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernet board with RPR
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 56 and 1314 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 15 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 56 and 13 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6 and 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EGR2
2 x GE Ethernet ring processing board
N1ADL4
1 x STM-4 ATM processing board
N1ADQ1
1 x STM-4 ATM processing board
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-23
3 Hardware
Board N1IDL4
Full Name 1 x STM-4 ATM processing board with IMA
Valid Slots Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 11 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1IDQ1
4 x STM-1 ATM processing board with IMA
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 (1.25 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 11 13 (1.25 Gbit/s)
N1MST4
4-port multiservice transparent transmission board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 1516 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 58 and 1114 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 14 and 15 16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 58 and 11 14 (2.5 Gbit/s) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 15 and 14 16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 68 and 11 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1DX1 N1DXA
N x 64 kbit/s access and convergence board N x 64 kbit/s convergence and processing board
Slots 15 and 1316 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 1117 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 17 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 16
N1DM12
N x 64 kbit/s interface board
Slots 1926 and 2936
3-24
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1LWX
Full Name Wavelength converting board
N1MR2A
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
N1MR2C
TN11OBU1
Optical booster amplifier board
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-25
3 Hardware
Board TN11MR2
Full Name 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
TN11MR4
TN11CMR2
2-channel CWDM optical add/ drop multiplexing board
TN11CMR4
4-channel CWDM optical add/ drop multiplexing board
3-26
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1BA2
Full Name Optical booster amplifier board
N1BPA
1-channel amplifier and 1channel preamplifier board
N1DCU
Dispersion compensation board
N2DCU
Dispersion compensation board
N1COA/ 61COA/62COA
Case-shaped optical amplifier
Slots 101102
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-27
3 Hardware
Board N1AUX
Full Name System auxiliary interface board
Valid Slots Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slot 37 (slot 87 in the extended subrack) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slot 37 (slot 87 in the extended subrack) Valid slot when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slot 37
N1PIU
PIU board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2728 (slots 7778 in the extended subrack) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2728 (slots 7778 in the extended subrack) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 27 and 28
N1FAN
Fan board
Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 3840 (slots 8890 in the extended subrack) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 3840 (slots 8890 in the extended subrack) Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 38 and 40
N1FANA N1FIB
Fan board Filter isolating board (passive)
Slots 3840 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 18, 11 17, 5158, and 6167 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 18, 1117, 5158, and 6167 Valid slots when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 18 and 11 16
ROP
Single wavelength long-haul board (external)
Slot 103
NOTE The slots for the N1COA, 61COA, 62COA, and ROP are logical slots rather than physical slots.
3.3.3 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of the subrack cover the subrack dimensions and weight. Table 3-4 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
3 Hardware
Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack Dimensions (mm) 497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) Weight (kg) 23 (net weight of the subrack without any board or fan)
3.4 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards. 3.4.1 Board Type The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of some units. 3.4.2 SDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards. 3.4.3 PDH Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards. 3.4.4 DDN Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN processing boards. 3.4.5 Data Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports data processing boards. 3.4.6 WDM Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards. 3.4.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards. 3.4.8 Auxiliary Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards.
3.4.1 Board Type

The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of some units. The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the following untis:
l l l l l l l l l l
SDH interface unit PDH interface unit DDN interface unit Ethernet interface unit Resilient packet ring unit ATM interface unit SAN interface unit WDM unit SDH cross-connect matrix unit Synchronous timing unit
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
l l l l l
SCC unit Overhead processing unit Power input unit Auxiliary interface unit Fan unit
Figure 3-5 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-5 lists the constituent boards and functions of each unit. Figure 3-5 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
SDH/PDH/Ethernet/ ATM/DDN Interface board
SDH Interface Unit
Cross Connect Matrix
STM-N Optical Signal
PDH Signal Ethernet Signal ATM Signal
Synchronous timing Unit
Interface Unit Auxiliary
Overhead Processing Unit
Table 3-5 Constituent boards and functions of each unit Unit SDH interface unit Processing board Constituent Board N1SL64, N2SL64, N1SLD64, N1SF64, N1SF16, N2SLQ16, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N1SLD16, N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N2SLD4, N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SLH1, N2SLO1, N1SLT1, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SEP1, N1SEP N1EU08, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EU04 N1TSB8, N1TSB4 Function Access and process STM-1/STM-4/ STM-16/STM-64 optical signals and VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/ VC-4-64c concatenated optical signals. Access and process STM-16/64 optical signals with FEC. Access and process STM-1 electrical signals, and conducts TPS protection for them.
Interface board Protection switching board
3-30
SCC Unit
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Unit PDH interface unit Processing board
Constituent Board N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N1PL3A, N1PQ1, N2PQ3, N1PQM, N2PQ1 N1MU04, N1D34S, N1C34S, N1D75S, N1D12S, N1D12B N1TSB8, N1TSB4 N1DX1, N1DXA DM12
Function Access and process E1/ T1, E3/T3 and E4/ STM-1 PDH electrical signals, and provide TPS protection for them.
Interface board
Protection switching board DDN interface unit Processing board Interface board
Access and process N x 64 kbit/s (N: 131) signals and framed E1 signals. Cross-connect the N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side and provide TPS protection for them. Access and process 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX, 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-TX Ethernet signals.
Ethernet interface unit
Processing board
N1EGS2, N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFT8, EFT8A, N1EMS4, N1EGS4 N1ETS8 (with the TPS function), N1ETF8, N1EFF8 N1TSB8
Interface board
Protection switching board
Provide TPS protection for Ethernet services of the N2EFS0 and the N4EFS0 boards. Access and process 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX, 100Base-FX, and 10/100Base-TX Ethernet signals. Support RPR features. Access and process STM-4, STM-1, E3 and IMA E1 ATM signals. Access and transparently transmit SAN services and video services.
RPR unit
Processing board Interface board
N1EMR0, N2EMR0, N2EGR2 N1ETF8, N1EFF8
ATM interface unit
N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1 N1MST4
SAN interface unit
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-31
3 Hardware
Unit WDM unit
Constituent Board N1MR2A, N1MR2C, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4 N1LWX
Function Add/drop and multiplex any two adjacent wavelengths. Access signals at arbitrary bit rates (34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s NRZ-coded signals). Convert client-side wavelengths to standard wavelengths that are compliant with ITU-T G.692.
ROP, N1FIB
The N1FIB board filters and isolates the optical signals output from the ROP board. Cross-connect SDH and PDH signals. Provide system clock for the equipment. Perform the system control and communication function. Process overhead of SDH signals.
SDH cross-connect matrix unit Synchronous timing unit
N1SXCSA, N1SXCSB, N1GXCSA, N1EXCSA, N1UXCSA, N1UXCSB, N1XCEb N1GSCC, N3GSCC
SCC unit Overhead processing unit
Power interface unit
N1PIU
Access power supply and protect the equipment against abnormal power. Provide various administration and maintenance interfaces. Dissipate heat for the system. Amplify and preamplify the optical power. Compensate dispersion for STM-64 optical signals.
Auxiliary interface unit
N1AUX
Fan unit Optical booster amplifier and dispersion compensation unit Optical amplifier board Dispersion compensation board
N1FAN, N1FANA TN11OBU1, N1BA2, N1BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA N1DCU, N2DCU
3-32
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
3.4.2 SDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards. Table 3-6 lists the SDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-6 SDH processing boards Board N1SL64 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interface Type I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e Conne ctor LC
N2SL64
LC
N1SF64
LC
N1SLD64
I-64.1, S-64.2b
LC
N1SLD16
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SF16
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
LC
N2SLQ16
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SL16
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
LC
N2SL16
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
LC
N3SL16
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
LC
N3SL16A
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-33
3 Hardware
Board N1SLQ4
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel
Interface Type I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
Conne ctor LC
N2SLQ4
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SLD4
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N2SLD4
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SL4
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N2SL4
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SLT1
S-1.1
LC
N1SLH1
LC
N1SLQ1
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N2SLQ1
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1SL1
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N2SL1
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1SEP1a
75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface
BNC
3-34
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1SEPa
Interfacing Mode 8 x STM-1 line processing board: N1OU08 8 x STM-1 line processing board: N2OU08 8 x STM-1 line processing board: N1EU08
Interface Type I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1
Conne ctor LC
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1
SC
75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface
BNC
N2SLO1
Interfaces available on the front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are the boards of the same type. When they are used with the interface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. When they provide interfaces on the front panel, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
3.4.3 PDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards. Table 3-7 shows the PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-7 PDH processing boards Board N1SPQ4 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board: N1MU04 Interfaces available on the 4 x electrical interface board: N1MU04 6 x electrical interface switching board: N1D34S 6 x electrical interface switching board: N1D34S 3 x electrical interface switching board: N1C34S Interface Type 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface Connect or BNC
N2SPQ4
BNC
N1PD N2PD3 N1PL3
BNC BNC BNC
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-35
3 Hardware
Board N1PL3A N2PL3 N2PL3A N2PQ3 N1PQ1A
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel 3 x electrical interface switching board: N1C34S Interfaces available on the front panel 6 x electrical interface switching board: N1D34S Interfaces available on the 32channel 75-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D75S Interfaces available on the 32channel 120-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D12S Interfaces available on the 32channel 120-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D12S nterfaces available on the 32channel 75-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D75S Interfaces available on the 32channel 120-ohm electrical interface switching board: N1D12S
Interface Type 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interface 75-ohm E1 interface
Connect or BNC BNC BNC BNC DB44
N1PQ1B
120-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N1PQM
120-ohm E1 interface, 100ohm T1 interface
DB44
N2PQ1A
75-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N2PQ1B
120-ohm E1 interface
DB44
3.4.4 DDN Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN processing boards. Table 3-8 lists the DDN processing boards. Table 3-8 DDN processing boards Board N1DX1 Full Name N x 64 kbit/s service access and convergence board Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the N x 64 kbit/s interface board N1DM12 Interface Type RS232, RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1 Connect or DB28, DB44
3-36
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
Board N1DXA
Full Name N x 64 kbit/s service convergence board
Interfacing Mode None
Interface Type None
Connect or None
3.4.5 Data Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports data processing boards. Table 3-9 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-9 Data processing boards and their interfaces Board N1EGS2 N2EGS2 N1EFS0 Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8 N2EFS0 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8 N4EFS0 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8 N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interface Type 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100Base-TX Connector LC LC RJ-45
100Base-FX
LC
10/100Base-TX
RJ-45
100Base-FX
LC
10/100Base-TX
RJ-45
100Base-FX
LC
10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX
RJ-45 RJ-45 LC
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-37
3 Hardware
Board N1EFT8
Interfacing Mode Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board, N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8
Interface Type 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX
Connector RJ-45 RJ-45
100Base-FX
LC
N1EFT8A N1EMS4
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel and the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board, N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8 Interfaces available on the front panel
10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX
RJ-45 RJ-45
100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX 10/100Base-TX
LC
LC LC LC RJ-45
N1EGS4 N1EMR0 and N2EMR0
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twisted pair interface board, N1ETF8 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board, N1EFF8
100Base-FX
LC
N2EGR2 N1ADL4 N1ADQ1 N1IDL4 N1IDQ1 N1MST4
Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel Interfaces available on the front panel
1000Base-SX/LX/ ZX S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 -
LC LC LC LC LC LC
3-38
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3 Hardware
3.4.6 WDM Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards. Table 3-10 lists the WDM boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-10 WDM boards and theri interfaces Board N1MR2A N1MR2B N1MR2C N1LWX TN11MR2 TN11MR4 TN11CMR2 TN11CMR4 Full Name 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board 4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board Interface Type LC LC LC LC LC LC LC LC
3.4.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards. Table 3-11 lists the optical booster amplifier boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-11 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces Board N1BA2 N1BPA 61COA N1COA 62COA N1DCU, N2DCU ROP N1FIB TN11OBU1 Full Name Optical booster amplifier board Optical booster and pre-amplifier board Case-shaped erbium doped fiber amplifier unit Case-shaped single-channel pre-amplifier unit Case-shaped fiber Raman amplifier unit Dispersion compensation unit Remote optical pumping board Wavelength filter and isolating board (passive, used with the ROP) Optical booster amplifier board Interface Type LC LC SC SC SC, E2000 LC LC LC, E2000 LC
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
3-39
3 Hardware
3.4.8 Auxiliary Boards

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards. Table 3-12 lists the auxiliary boards for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-12 Auxiliary boards and theri interfaces Board N1PIU N1FAN N1FANA N1AUX Full Name Power interface unit Fan control board Full-speed fan board System auxiliary interface and orderwire phone processing board Interface Type None None None BNC, RJ-45
3-40
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
4 Software
4
About This Chapter
4.1 Overview The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is of a modular structure.
Software
The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 includes NE software and board software.
4.2 Board Software The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. 4.3 NE Software The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE. The NE software also serves as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs. 4.4 T2000 System The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). 4.5 ASON Software According to ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
4-1
4 Software
4.1 Overview
The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is of a modular structure. The software system includes the following modules:
l l l l
Board software (residing in each relevant board) NE software (residing in the SCC board) T2000 software (residing on a T2000 computer) ASON software (contained in the NE software)
The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is as shown in Figure 4-1. Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 3500
T2000 software
NE software
ASON software
Board software
NOTE
The ASON software can interact with the T2000 software directly, but it needs the NE software as a vehicle to intercommunicate with the board software.
4.2 Board Software

The board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation of the board. The board software receives the commands issued by the NE software and reports the board status to the NE software in the form of performance events and alarms. The board software functions include alarm management, performance management, configuration management, and communication management. The board software directly controls the functional modules in a board and implements specific NE functions that are compliant with ITU-T Recommendations. The board software provides support for the management of boards performed by the NE software. The board software is mainly classified into the line software, the tributary software, the crossconnect software, the data board software, the clock software, and the orderwire software.
4 Software
4.3 NE Software
The NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE. The NE software also serves as the communication unit between the T2000 system and the boards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs. In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element management layer in the telecommunications management network (TMN), and provides NE functions, some coordination functions, and operations system functions at the network element layer. The data communication function implements the communication between the NE and other components (including equipment, the T2000 system, and other NEs). The NE software consists of the following modules:
l l l l l
Real-time multitask operating system Network side (NS) module Equipment administration module (AM) Communication module Database management module
Real-Time Multitask Operating System

The real-time multitask operating system of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE software is responsible for the management of public resources and provides support for the execution of applications. This system provides an application execution environment that is independent of the processor hardware, to separate applications from the processor.
Network Side (NS) Module

The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer. Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
l l l
Qx interface module Command line interface module Security management module
Equipment Administration Module (AM)

The equipment AM is the kernel of the NE software for implementing NE management, and includes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management operation commands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the network management operation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations to managed objects, and reports events according to the status change of the managed objects. The equipment AM includes the configuration management module, the performance management module, the alarm management module, and the MSP switching management module.
4 Software
Communication Module
The communication module fulfills the message communication function (MCF) of the functional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware interface provided by the SCC board, the communication module transmits the OAM&P information and exchanges management information between the T2000 system and NEs, and between NEs themselves. This module consists of the network communication module, the serial communication module, and the ECC communication module.
Database Management Module

The database management module is an integral component of the NE software, and consists of the data and the management system. The database, organized as a relational database, includes the network database, alarm database, performance database, and equipment database. The management system manages and accesses the data in the database.
4.4 T2000 System

The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). The OptiX iManager T2000 is used as a network management system to implement a uniform management of the optical transmission network, and to maintain all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM equipment in the network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. The T2000 software manages OptiX equipment through the Qx interface, which adopts a management protocol specially designed for the OptiX equipment. The T2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC. The T2000 enables the user not only to operate and maintain transmission equipment, but also to manage the transmission network.
l
Alarm management
The T2000 realizes the following alarm management functions: real-time collection, prompting, filtering, browsing, acknowledgement, check, clearing, counting, alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis, and fault diagnosis.
l
Performance management
The T2000 realizes the setting of performance monitoring, and enables the user to browse, analyze, and print performance data. The medium-term and long-term performance forecast and the performance register reset are also supported.
l
Configuration management
The T2000 enables the user to configure and manage interfaces, clocks, services, trails, protections, and time.
l
Security management
The T2000 realizes NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT) access control.

l
4 Software
Maintenance management
The T2000 provides the loopback, board reset, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and optical power detection, and data collection functions, to help maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.
4.5 ASON Software

According to ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane. The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP, OSPF-TE, and RSVP-TE protocols. Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes the link management module (which uses the link management protocol LMP), the signaling module, the routing module, and the cross-connection management module. Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture
AOSN software
T2000
Signaling module Cross-connection management module
NE software
Routing module
LMP link management module
Link Management Module

Using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:
l l
Create and maintain control channels. Verify member links and TE links.
Signaling Module
Using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:
l l
Set up or tear down service connections according to user requests. Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
4 Software
Routing Module
Using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
l l l
Collect and flood the TE link information. Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane. Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
l l
Create and delete cross-connections. Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.
4-6
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
5
About This Chapter
Data Features
The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, SAN features and DDN features. 5.1 Ethernet Features This section describes the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions, application and protection. 5.2 RPR Features This section describes the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions, application and protection. 5.3 ATM Features This section describes the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions, application and protection. 5.4 SAN Features The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services. 5.5 DDN Features This section describes the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions and application.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-1
5 Data Features
5.1 Ethernet Features

This section describes the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions, application and protection. 5.1.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the Ethernet boards N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EGS2, N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A to meet different Ethernet service requirements. 5.1.2 Application The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. 5.1.3 Protection The protection schemes for Ethernet services include LCAS and LAG.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the Ethernet boards N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N1EGS2, N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A to meet different Ethernet service requirements. Table 5-1, Table 5-2, Table 5-3 and Table 5-4 list the Ethernet functions of these boards. Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0 Function Interface Interface type N1EFS4 4 FE 10Base-T, 100BaseTX N2EFS4 4 FE 10Base-T, 100BaseTX N1EFS0 8 FE 10Base-T, 100BaseTX, 100BaseFX N1ETF8, N1EFF8 N2EFS0 8 FE 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX N4EFS0 8 FE 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board
None
None
N1ETS8 (cooperating with TSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS), N1ETF8, N1EFF8
Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported, 9600 bytes 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x12) 12 24 12 24 24
5-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
Function Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation Link state pass through (LPT) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) Committed access rate (CAR) Intra-board port aggregation Flow control Test frame Ethernet performance monitoring RMON
N1EFS4 Supported Supported Supported Supported
N2EFS4
N1EFS0
N2EFS0
N4EFS0
MartinioE label supported Supported IEEE 802.1q/p Supported Supported Generic framing procedure (GFP) Supported ITU-T G.7042
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s) Not supported IEEE 802.3X Supported Supported Supported Not supported Supported Supported
Supported
Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2 Function Interface Interface type

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
N1EGS2 2 GE
N2EGS2
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX

5 Data Features
Function Interface board Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR Flow control Intra-board port aggregation Test frame Ethernet performance monitoring RMON
N1EGS2 None
N2EGS2
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported, 9600 bytes 8 VC-4 16 VC-4
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x12) 24 Supported Not supported Supported Not supported Not supported Not supported IEEE 802.1q/p Not supported Not supported GFP Supported Not supported ITU-T G.7042 Supported Supported Supported MartinioE label supported Supported Supported 48
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s) IEEE 802.3X Not supported Supported Supported Supported
Supported
5-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
Table 5-3 Function list of N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A Function Interface Interface type N1EGT2 2 GE 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX None N1EFT8 16 FE 10Base-T, 100BaseTX, 100Base-FX Supports 8 x FE if not used with an interface board.Supports 16 x FE if used with interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8. N1EFT8A 8 FE 10Base-T, 100Base-TX None
Interface board
Service frame format JUMBO frame
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-xv (x24), VC-4-xv (x8) 2 Supported by the latter four ports, 9600 bytes 8 VC-4 Supported by the latter four ports, 9600 bytes 4 VC-4
Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode
VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x3) 16 8
Number of VCTRUNKs Ethernet service types MPLS VLAN Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR Flow control Test frame Ethernet performance monitoring
Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported Not supported Transparent transmission GFP, LAPS, HDLC Not supported ITU-T G.7042 Not supported IEEE 802.3X Supported Supported
Table 5-4 Function list of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Function Interface N1EMS4 4 GE and 16 FE N1EGS4 4 GE
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-5
5 Data Features
Function Interface type
N1EMS4 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX Supports 4 x GE if not used with an interface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if used with interface boards N1ETF8 and N1EFF8.
N1EGS4 1000Base-SX, 1000BaseLX, 1000Base-ZX None
Interface board
Protection Service frame format JUMBO frame Uplink bandwidth Mapping mode Number of VCTRUNKs EPL EVPL EPLAN EVPLAN Static MPLS label VLAN RSTP Multicast listening (IGMP snooping) Encapsulation LPT LCAS CAR QoS traffic classification CoS Shaping
Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection. Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p Supported, 9216 bytes 16 VC-4 VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x63), VC-3-xv (x24), VC-4-xv (x8) 64 Supported Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services. Supported Not supported Not supported Supports VLAN and QinQ. Supports the adding, deletion and exchange of VLAN labels, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supported Supported GFP, LAPS, HDLC Supported ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s) Supports port flow and port+VLAN flow. Supported Supported
5-6
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
Function Flow control Ethernet performance monitoring Ethernet OAM Test frame Service mirroring Link aggregation
N1EMS4
N1EGS4
Supports IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control, based on GE/FE port. Supported
Supported Supported Supported Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmission platform. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l l l l
EPL Service EVPL Service EPLAN Service EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
There are two types of EPL services.
l
EPL service based on port
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH selfhealing ring (SHR). In this way, the secure and reliable transmission is guaranteed. Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
NE 4 1 4 NE 1 5 2 NE 2
SHR
NE 3 3
Traffic flow
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-7
5 Data Features
l
EPL service based on port+VLAN
EPL services can be isolated by VLAN tags when these services share a VCTRUNK bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according to the port and VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs of Companies A and B. A maximum of two priorities can be set according to the traffic classification result. For security purpose, the OptiX OSN 3500 isolates services of different users by VLANs. In Figure 5-2, VLAN 1 of Company A shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 11 of Company B, VLAN 2 of Company A shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 12 of Company B, and VLAN 3 of Company A shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 13 of Company B. All services of Company A are converged to NE1 and then sent through an FE/GE interface of NE1 to the Lanswitch for further processing. Figure 5-2 EPL service based on port+VLAN
Headquarters of Company A
VLAN 3 VLAN 2 VLAN 11 VLAN 12
Headquarters of Company B
VLAN 1
VLAN 13
NE 1
VLAN 1 VLAN 3
Branch
VLAN 11
NE 2
3 2
NE 4
VLAN 13
SHR
NE 3
Branch
VLAN 2
VLAN 12
Traffic flow
Branch
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the Martini MPLS L2 VPN encapsulation format to support EVPL services. An EVPL service offers point-to-point connection and implements service convergence for users. As shown in Figure 5-3, the system searches the port+VLAN ID table for the external label (Tunnel) and the internal label (VC), and encapsulates them into the accessed data frames. In the network, data forwarding is based on the external label. In the last-hop provider edge (PE) equipment, the external and internal labels are stripped, and data forwarding at the egress port is based on these labels. The OptiX OSN 3500 contains the functions of both provider (P) and provider edge (PE) equipment.
NOTE
PE equipment is used to interconnect user equipment and to access user services. P equipment is used for the routing function and the forwarding of MPLS encapsulated services.
5-8
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
Figure 5-3 EVPL service
Company A
60 PE1 PortA PortB 70 10 20 Data Data 60 P P 70 10 20 Data Data PE2
Company A
PortA PortB
Tunnel VC label adding/stripping
Tunnel
Tunnel
Company
TunnelLable
VC Label
Data
L2 MPLS network composed by OptiX OSN Product
Tunnel VC label adding/stripping
Company B
A B
...
60 70
...
10 20
...
...
.. . .. .
EPLAN Service
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service, which can be transferred according to its destination media access control (MAC) address. As shown in Figure 5-4, respective LANs of Companies A and B are connected to four NEs. The Ethernet services among the four NEs are not of a fixed point-to-point type. For example, if a user of Company A connected to NE3 needs to communicate with users of Company A connected to the other three NEs, the service flow directions are not fixed. The Ethernet Layer 2 switching function provided by the OptiX OSN 3500 can be employed to solve this problem. For example, after relevant settings on NE3, the system sets up a MAC address table that can be periodically updated by self-learning. Then, the data of Companies A and B accessed at NE3 can be transmitted to their destinations over either the same VCTRUNK or different VCTRUNKs, according to their respective MAC address tables. In this way, the system configuration is simplified, and the bandwidth utilization is improved. In addition, the maintenance and management of equipment becomes easy for the operator.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-9
5 Data Features
Figure 5-4 EPLAN service

Company A Company B
NE1
NE2 Company A 3 Company B 2 1
NE4 Company A
NE3
Company B
VC-Trunk MAC Address MAC 1 NE1 MAC 2 NE4 NE2 MAC 3

Company A
Company B
Traffic flow
EVPLAN Service
The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the MPLS encapsulation format to support EVPLAN services. The EVPLAN service implements the multipoint-to-multipoint connection of user sites. From the viewpoint of user, the EVPLAN network is a big VLAN where the user services can be converged. As shown in Figure 5-5, when the users data frame (the source address is MAC H, and the destination address is MAC A, B or C) enters the PE equipment, the system searches the Layer 2 MAC address table, and obtains the external label (Tunnel label) and the internal label (VC label). As a result, different label switch paths (LSPs) are set up depending on the addresses. When the data frame goes out of the PE equipment, the Tunnel and VC labels are stripped. After a search in the Layer 2 MAC address table, the Ethernet frame is forwarded to the relevant egress port according to its destination address.
5-10
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
Figure 5-5 EVPLAN service

P MPLS Core PE Address = MAC C
P Address = MAC A PE Branch A LSP3 LSP1 PE
Branch C
Address = MAC B
PE Branch B
LSP2 Transferd to corresponding port via the Layer 2 route table Address = MAC H
Source MAC H MAC H MAC H
Sink MAC A MAC B MAC C
Tunnel Label
VC Label
LSP
1 2 3
10 20 30
LSP1 LSP2 LSP3 Headquarters
5.1.3 Protection
The protection schemes for Ethernet services include LCAS and LAG. The Ethernet services of the OptiX OSN equipment are protected by various protection schemes, including:
l l l l l l l l
LCAS STP/RSTP Tributary protection switching (TPS) Board protection switching (BPS) Port protection switching (PPS) Link aggregation group (LAG) Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP LPT
LCAS
The LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the virtual concatenation function. The LCAS has the following functions:
l
When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology, the LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the concatenated VC quantity, and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change). The LCAS protects and restores failed members.
As shown in Figure 5-6, the LCAS can dynamically add or delete members to increase or decrease the bandwidth. Services are not interrupted during such bandwidth adjustment.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-11
5 Data Features
Figure 5-6 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS

I want another 10 M bandwidth. MSTP network Member Member Branch
Headquarters
Member
Member Branch New member
Headquarters
MSTP
As shown in Figure 5-7, the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service. When some members fail, the faulty members are automatically deleted, while other members keep transmitting data normally. When the faulty members are available again, they are automatically restored, and the data is loaded to these members again. Figure 5-7 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS
MSTP network Member Member Branch Failed member
Headquarters
Member Member Branch
Headquarters
Delete failed member
MSTP
STP/RSTP
The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to avoid a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology.
5-12
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
TPS
The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. In this way, a reliable operation of the equipment is ensured. The OSN 3500 supports two groups of 1:1 TPS protection for the N2EFS0 or N4EFS0 board.
BPS
The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service protection. The N1EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the BPS.
PPS
The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary. Compared with the BPS, the PPS has less impact on external systems and the network. The N1EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the PPS.
LAG
A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regarded as one link. The LAG provides the following functions:
l
Improve the link availability. In an LAG, members dynamically back up each other. When one link is interrupted, other members quickly take over. Add the link bandwidth. The LAG is an economic way for the user to increase the link transmission rate. When multiple physical links are bundled, the user is able to obtain a data link of higher bandwidth, without upgrade the existing equipment. The capacity of an LAG equals the sum of the capacity of all member links. Balance load. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and back up each other. Improve the reliability. Members in an LAG dynamically back up each other. Support link aggregation. The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support link aggregation, and currently support manual aggregation and static aggregation.
l l
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes.
5 Data Features
LPT
The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active port to the standby port and are thus protected.
5.2 RPR Features

This section describes the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions, application and protection. The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 employs a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-8. Both the outer ring and the inner ring transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, the bandwidth utilization is increased. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The two rings protect each other. Figure 5-8 RPR ring
Node 1
Outer ring data Outer ring control
Node 2
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Inner ring data Inner ring control
Node 3
5.2.1 Functions The RPR functions cover the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm. 5.2.2 Application The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services. 5.2.3 Protection The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.
5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions cover the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
5 Data Features
Basic Functions
The EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the RPR features defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-5 lists the basic functions of RPR boards. Table 5-5 Function list of RPR boards Function Boards N1EMR0 Interface Service frame format JUMBO frame Maximum uplink bandwidth Mapping granularity EVPL EVPLAN Static MPLS label Stack VLAN VLAN Spanning tree Multicast listening (IGMP Snooping) RPR protection Encapsulation 1 GE and 12 FE N2EMR0 1 GE and 12 FE N2EGR2 2 GE
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG Supported, 9600 bytes 16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s) VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (X8) Supported Supported MartinioE label supported Supported Supports 4096 VLAN tags, as well as the adding, deletion, and exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p. Supports RSTP Supported
Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection schemes, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms. GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041. LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.
LCAS CAR Flow control QoS traffic classification
Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042 Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s) Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X The N1EMR0 board supports traffic classification based on port, port +VLAN ID, or port+VLAN PRI. The N2EM40 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic classification based on port, port+VLAN ID, port+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, or MPLS_label.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-15
5 Data Features
Function
Boards N1EMR0 N2EMR0 Supported N2EGR2 Supported
Intra-board port aggregation Weighted fairness algorithm Topology autodiscovery Maximum number of nodes Service class
Not supported Supported Supported 255
Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR and C
Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses. Table 5-6 lists the differences among these classes. Table 5-6 RPR service class Class A Subcla ss A0 A1 B B_CIR B_EIR C C Bandwidth Pre-allocated, irreclaimable Pre-allocated, reclaimable Pre-allocated, reclaimable Preemptible, not preallocated Preemptible, not preallocated Jitter Low Low Medi um High High Fairness Algorithm Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Relevant Relevant Applicatio n Real-time services Real-time services Near realtime services Near realtime services Best effort transmission
Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all nodes in a ring network. Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR. To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting existing services.
5 Data Features
Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-9, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved. Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse
Node 1 Traffic 1 1.25 Gbit/s
Node 2
Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Bandwidth of single ring is 1.25Gbit/s Node 3
Traffic 2 1.25 Gbit/s
Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide at what bandwidth the node transmits lowerclass services on the inner ring and the outer ring. As shown in Figure 5-10, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outer ring, assume the bandwidth that is available for lower-class services to preempt is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1. Figure 5-11 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths respectively for the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-17
5 Data Features
Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1

Node Node2 Node3 Node4 Node 1 Weight 1 1 1
3 2 Node 2 Node 3 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 6 Node 5
Traffic 1 2 3
Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s 400 Mbit/s
Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different

Node Node2 Node3 Node4 Node 1 Weight 1 3 2
3 2 Node 2 1 Node 3
Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Traffic 1 2 3 Bandwidth 400 Mbit/s 600 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.
EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format. Figure 5-12 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet. Figure 5-13 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which traffic classification is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1.
5 Data Features
Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 2 Node 4
FE/GE
FE/GE
LSP Action Tunnel VC Destination Insertion 100 100 Node 4 Node 3
Action Tunnel VC
Stripping 100 100
Action
Forwarding
Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence

VLAN 2 VLAN 3
Traffic Port1+VLAN 2 Port1+VLAN 3 Port1+VLAN 4
Tunnel 200 300 400
VC 200 300 400
Destination Node 2 Node 3 Node 4
VLAN 4
GE
Node 1
FE
VLAN 2
Node 2
Node 4
FE
VLAN 4
Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 3
FE
VLAN 3
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes. Figure 5-14 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards packets in the same way.
5 Data Features
Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service

A1 A2 MAC forwarding table of node 1 Port 2 Port 1 Node 1 Dual-ring A2 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 2 B2 Port 2 MAC forwarding table of node 2 Node 3 MAC A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 Port rpr1 rpr1 port 1 port 2 rpr1 stack VLAN 100 100 none none 100 Node 4 MAC A1 A2 B1 B2 C1 Port port 1 port 2 rpr1 rpr1 rpr1 stack VLAN none none 100 100 100
B1
Port 1
Port 1 C1
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes. The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
l l l l
Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering LCAS RSTP Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP
Wrapping
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, thus to connect the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this protection scheme are a fast protection speed and a small loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth. Figure 5-15 illustrates the wrapping protection. The traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, Nodes 2 and 3 perform an automatic loopback to connect the inner ring and the outer ring, so that the protection is realized.
5-20
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
Figure 5-15 Wrapping protection

Node 2 Fiber cut
X
Node 3 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4
Traffic flow
Node 1
Node 6
Node 5
Steering
In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated. Figure 5-16 illustrates the steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1, all through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, the topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology. On the basis of this new topology, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1, all through the inner ring. Figure 5-16 Steering protection
Node 2 Fiber cut
X
Node 3 Node 4
Traffic flow before switching
Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 1
Traffic flow after switching
Node 6
Node 5
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-21
5 Data Features
Wrapping+Steering
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and lessen the packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route and the waste of bandwidth is lessened. Figure 5-17 illustrates the wrapping+steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the traffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1, all through the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, a wrapping switching is first performed, so Nodes 2 and 3 are automatically loopbacked. After the topology autodiscovery protocol discovers a new topology, a steering switching is performed. As a result, the traffic passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1, all through the inner ring. Figure 5-17 Wrapping+steering protection
Node 2 Fiber cut Traffic flow
X
Node 3 Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 4
Node 1
Node 6
Node 5
Node 2 Fiber cut
X
Dual-ring 2.5 Gbit/s RPR Node 1 Traffic flow after switching Node 6
Node 3
Node 4
Node 5
5-22
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
LCAS
The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the bandwidth. For details about the LCAS, refer to section 5.1.3 Protection.
RSTP
The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the network topology to avoid a broadcast storm.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.
5.3 ATM Features

This section describes the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions, application and protection. 5.3.1 Functions OThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4, and IDQ1. 5.3.2 Application The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services. 5.3.3 Protection The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers.
5.3.1 Functions
OThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1, IDL4, and IDQ1. An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an N1ADQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services. Table 5-7 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards. Table 5-7 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1 Function Boards ADL4 Front panel interface Optical interface specification
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
ADQ1 4 x STM-1 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2

5-23
1 x STM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2
5 Data Features
Function
Boards ADL4 ADQ1
Connector type Optical module type E3 ATM interface IMA Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection (ITU-T I.630) OAM function (ITUT I.610)
LC SFP Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or N1PL3A board. Not supported 8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4 1.2 Gbit/s VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x4) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services. Table 5-8 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards. Table 5-8 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1 Function Boards N1IDL4 Front panel interface Optical interface specification Connector type 1 x STM-4 S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 LC N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2
5-24
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
Function
Boards N1IDL4 N1IDQ1
Optical module type E3 ATM interface IMA (compliant with ATM Forum IMA 1.1 standards)
SFP Not supported Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1 processing board N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1. Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services. Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATM port. Each IMA group supports 132 E1 services.Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to the ATM port. Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink bandwidth ATM switching capability Mapping mode Service type Number of ATM connections Traffic type and QoS Supported ATM multicast connections ATM protection (ITU-T I.630) OAM function (ITUT I.610) Board level 1+1 protection
8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4 1 Gbit/s VC-12, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (X4) CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR 2048 IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0 Spatial multicast and logical multicast
Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check) Supported, with switching time less than 1s
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR services, but does not support ABR services.
5 Data Features
l
The CBR services apply to voice services, as well as video services and circuit emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidth and latency. The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate. The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission. The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
l l l
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 3500 meets IETF RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 5-9. Table 5-9 ATM service types and traffic types No. 1 2 Traffic Type atmNoTrafficDescriptor atmNoClpNoScr Service Type UBR UBR.1 CBR 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr atmClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpScr atmClpNoTaggingScr atmClpTaggingScr atmClpTransparentNoScr atmClpTransparentScr atmNoClpTaggingNoScr atmNoClpNoScrCdvt CBR CBR nrt-VBR.1 nrt-VBR.2 nrt-VBR.3 CBR.1 rt-VBR.1 UBR.2 UBR CBR 12 13 14 atmNoClpScrCdvt atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 rt-VBR.2 rt-VBR.3 Parameter None Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services

When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output. As shown in Figure 5-18, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4
5 Data Features
bandwidth. Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel. Figure 5-18 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
DSLAM 34M ATM Traffic Service Convergence NE 1 2.5 Gbit/s SDH Ring NE 2 NE 4 Router
155M ATM Traffic
622M ATM Traffic
DSLAM NE 3
34M ATM Traffic DSLAM
Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services

The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs. As shown in Figure 5-19, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent onto the line by the cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-27
5 Data Features
Figure 5-19 VP-Ring/VC-Ring

DSLAM The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to the NE2, and then sent to VP/VC-Ring after converged with local service.
NE 1
34M ATM Traffic
155M ATM Traffic
VC4-Xv VP/ VC-Ring
NE 4
Route r
DSLAM
NE 2
622M ATM Traffic
NE 3 DSLAM
34M ATM Traffic
Application of IMA Services

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the far end, the lower rate links are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow. The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparently transmitted. Figure 5-20 illustrates the IMA service networking.
5-28
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
Figure 5-20 IMA service networking
RNC
NE1 T2000 25km 40km NE4
NodeB 1
NE2
STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring

35km NE3
NodeB 4
30km
NodeB 2
NodeB 3
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers. The following protections are available.
l l l
ATM layer protections Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards
ATM Layer Protections

Compliant with ITU-T I.630, protections at the ATM layer are classified in different ways, as listed in Table 5-10. You can select a combination of the following types as required, for example, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection. Table 5-10 Classification of ATM protection Classification Scheme Bridging function Switching direction Connection level Protection domain Revertive mode Protected object
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Protection Type 1+1 protection Unidirectional protection VPC protection Trail protection Revertive protection Single connection protection
1:1 protection Bidirectional protection VCC protection SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP Non-revertive protection Group connection protection
5-29
5 Data Features
Optical Transmission Layer Protections

The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP. You can set the holdoff time for the ATM protection switching. In this way, when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the ATM layer is not performed).
1+1 Board Level Protection for IMA Boards

The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For the configuration of 1 +1 board level protection, the IDQ1 and IDL4 boards must be inserted in paired slots.
5.4 SAN Features

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services. The N1MST4 board is described in detail as follows:
l
The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type. Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200) services, with the total bandwidth being not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one FC200 service or two FC100 services are supported. The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side. FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km. The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km. Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON or 4 x DVB-ASI services. All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
l l
Table 5-11 lists the service types and bit rates provided by the N1MST4 board. Table 5-11 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4 Service Type FC100/FICON FC200 ESCON DVB-ASI Bit Rate 1062.5 Mbit/s 2125 Mbit/s 200 Mbit/s 270 Mbit/s Remarks SAN service SAN service SAN service Video service
5-30
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5 Data Features
5.5 DDN Features

This section describes the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions and application. 5.5.1 Functions The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services. 5.5.2 Application When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
5.5.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interface board to access and process DDN services.
l
The N1DX1 board processes 8 x 64 kbit/s services and eight framed E1 services and realizes the service convergence. The N1DX1 also cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. The N1DXA board cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. Working with the N1DX1 board, the N1DM12 board accesses framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/ s services.
l l
Table 5-12 lists the functions and features of the DDN boards. Table 5-12 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA Board Feature Processing capability N1DX1 (N1DM12) Processes 8 x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services, and crossconnects 48 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side. 48 x E1. N x 64 bit/s interface: RS232, RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 and X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4. 75 ohms or 120 ohms. The connectors are on the DM12 board. The DB28 connector is used for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is used for framed E1 signals. N1DXA Cross-connects 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.
Bandwidth at SDH side Interface specifications
63 x E1. None.
Interface impedance Connector type
None. None.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
5-31
5 Data Features
Board Feature Protection Loopback PRBS self-test Alarm and performance
N1DX1 (N1DM12) Supports 1:N TPS protection with the switching time being less than 50 ms. Supports inloop and outloop for all ports. Supported. A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.
N1DXA Not supported. Supports inloop and outloop for all ports. Not supported. A large number of alarms and performance events are provided to facilitate the equipment management and maintenance.
5.5.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services. The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used on the following occasions, so various services such as RS232, RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can be accessed to a transmission network.
l l l l
Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers Access and convergence of multipoint routers
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls.
5-32
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
6 DCN Features
6
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several DCN schemes.
DCN Features
6.1 Overview The SDH element management system (EMS) sets up communication with SDH NEs through a data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these SDH NEs. 6.2 HWECC The HWECC protocol is a private protocol defined by Huawei. 6.3 IP Over DCC The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol. 6.4 OSI Over DCC The equipment supports the OSI Over DCC protocol.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
6-1
6 DCN Features
6.1 Overview
The SDH element management system (EMS) sets up communication with SDH NEs through a data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these SDH NEs. In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are both regarded as network nodes, which can be connected through Ethernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs). In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a building, in different buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection between the EMS and NEs usually requires an external DCN that is composed of equipment such as Lanswitch and routers. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. This section describes the internal DCN composed of SDH NEs. See Figure 6-1. Figure 6-1 DCN networking
HuaWei T2000
IP/OSI DCN
External DCN
HWECC or IP/OSI over DCC
Interior DCN
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN With the development of network scale, the OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost. 6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three communication protocols for the DCN networking.
6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN

With the development of network scale, the OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult. A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost. In a DCN, the D bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN management. The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so that the network construction cost is greatly lowered. For a DCN, the SDH provides the following bandwidth.

l
6 DCN Features
By using the D1D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the SDH provides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. By using the D4D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the SDH provides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN. By using the D1D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.
Figure 6-2 shows the positions of D bytes in SDH overheads. Figure 6-2 Positions of D bytes in SDH overheads
A1 B1 D1 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 AU PTR B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 A2 A2 J0 F1 D3
* RSOH
MSOH
6.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three communication protocols for the DCN networking. The three communication protocols are as follows.
l l l
HWECC TCP/IP (IP over DCC) OSI (OSI over DCC)
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN networking of OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and application. As it is private, the HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements for hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the management issue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. These two protocols can also be used in a network that is composed of only Huawei equipment.
NOTE
When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors' equipment that does not support the TCP/IP and OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent transmission function for DCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the OAM information.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
6-3
6 DCN Features
Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500 DCC Allocation Channel type Operation mode Mode 1 Mode 2 N1GSCC Supports both the D1D3 and D4D12 channel types. Supports 40 D1D3 channels. Supports 10 D1D3 channels. Supports 10 D4D12 channels. Mode 3 Supports 22 D1D3 channels. Supports 6 D4D12 channels. Default protocol type D1-D3 HWECC Default mode Mode 1 D4-D12 IP D1-D3 HWECC D4-D12 IP N3GSCC Supports both the D1D3 and D4D12 channel types. Supports 160 D1D3 channels. Supports 40 D1D3 channels. Supports 40 D4D12 channels. -
6.2 HWECC
The HWECC protocol is a private protocol defined by Huawei. 6.2.1 Features The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment. 6.2.2 Application The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
6.2.1 Features
The HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment. In hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not able to identify the OAM information from other vendors equipment, but can transparently transmit such OAM information. Using the existing DCC resources, the user is able to fulfill a centralized management of equipment. The HWECC protocol has the following features.
l l
The protocol provides a flexible networking environment. NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for embedded control channel (ECC) communication. The protocol provides transparent transmission for the OAM information from other vendors equipment.
NOTE
In the OptiX OSN 3500, each slot supports a maximum of eight ECC channels.
6-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
6 DCN Features
6.2.2 Application
The HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.
OAM Information Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment Only

When OAM information is transmitted only among OptiX OSN equipment, a gateway NE is required for the communication with the T2000. Connected to the gateway NE through the Qx interface, the T2000 tests, manages and maintains the entire network. The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality, lower the maintenance cost, and ensure a reasonable use of network resources. A non-gateway NE is connected to the gateway NE through ECC, to realize the transmission of the OAM information. In some special cases, extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is also available among NEs. See Figure 6-3. Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC
PC
HUB1
GNE1
N NE6 E6 NE5
HUB2
NE7
NE12
NE2
NE8 NE9
NE11 NE10
NE3 Network cable Fiber
NE4
Subnet1
Subnet2
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4D12 bytes of the OptiX OSN equipment. See Figure 6-4. Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)
D1-D3 Third party equipment
Transparent transmission
D1-D3 Third party equipment
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
6-5
6 DCN Features
OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4-D12 bytes of the equipment. See Figure 6-5. Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)
Third party equipment
Transparent transmission
D1-D3
D1-D3
6.3 IP Over DCC

The equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol. 6.3.1 Features Using the IP over DCC protocol, the OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information. 6.3.2 Application The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6.3.1 Features
Using the IP over DCC protocol, the OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network management information. The IP over DCC protocol has the following features.
l
The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment from other vendors. In this case, the network management is simplified. The Layer 3 functions of protocol stacks are adopted. In this case, additional overheads or server trails are not required for the transmission of the OAM information of other vendors equipment. The protocol provides flexible networking modes. Several application layer protocols are supported.
l l
6.3.2 Application
The IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6 DCN Features

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-6. Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (IP)
IP over DCC

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by using the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-7. Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (IP)
Third party equipment Third party equipment
IP over DCC Third party equipment Third party equipment
6.4 OSI Over DCC

The equipment supports the OSI Over DCC protocol.
6 DCN Features
6.4.1 Features The OSI over DCC protocol is for hybrid networking between OptiX OSN equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC. 6.4.2 Application The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.
6.4.1 Features
The OSI over DCC protocol is for hybrid networking between OptiX OSN equipment and other optical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC. The OSI over DCC protocol has the following features:
l
In a transmission network composed of equipment from different vendors, the OSI over DCC protocol enables transparent transmission of OAM information at the network layer, and thus provides a more flexible networking. The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. The existing DCC resources realize the centralized management of equipment from different vendors.
6.4.2 Application
The OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information of the OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol. As shown in Figure 6-8, Huawei equipment is at the network edges, and equipment from other vendors is in the backbone network. The OAM information between the T2000 and the OptiX OSN equipment needs to be forwarded by equipment from other vendors. In this case, each subnet composed of Huawei equipment must have at least one gateway NE. Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (OSI)
OSI protocol stack Third party equipment OSI protocol stack Third party equipment
OSI over DCC
OSI protocol stack
6-8
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
6 DCN Features

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information of the third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, by using the OSI over DCC protocol. As shown in Figure 6-9, the Huawei equipment is in the backbone network, and equipment from other vendors is at the network edges. The OAM information between the network management system and the equipment of other vendors needs to be forwarded by the Huawei equipment.
NOTE
In actual application, a network cannot always be divided in such a clear manner. A more common hybrid networking is that equipment from different vendors coexists at both the core layer and the peripheral layer.
Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (OSI)
Third party equipment OSI protocol stack OSI protocol stack
OSI over DCC
Third party equipment OSI protocol stack Third party equipment
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
6-9
7 ASON Features
7
About This Chapter
ASON Features
The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN series products. With this software, the traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN series products support the ASON features. 7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links. 7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient. 7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security. 7.4 SLA The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients. 7.5 Diamond Services Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation. 7.6 Gold Services Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization. 7.7 Silver Services The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement. 7.8 Copper Services The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services. 7.9 Iron Services
7 ASON Features
The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources. 7.10 Tunnels Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails. 7.11 Service Association The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network. 7.12 Service Optimization After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the service optimization. 7.13 Service Migration OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt the services. 7.14 Reverting Services to Original Routes After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes. You can revert all service to the original routes. 7.15 Preset Restoring Trail Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing. 7.16 Equilibrium of Network Traffic The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible. 7.17 Shared Risk Link Group In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable. 7.18 ASON Trail Group The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS. 7.19 Protocol Encryption You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network.
7-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7 ASON Features
7.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies

The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control links and TE links. 7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol. 7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol. When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 7-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets. Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management system for real-time display. See Figure 7-2.
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-2 Management of control topology
R1
R4
R2 R3 : ASON NE : User equipment
7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol. After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide resource topology. ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh. As shown in Figure 7-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed on the NM in real time.
7-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery
R1
R4
R2 R3
: ASON NE : User equipment
7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient. The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing. Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services. For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I in Figure 7-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route. The service is created as follows:
l l l l l
Choose the bandwidth granularity. Choose the server level. Choose the source node. Choose the sink node. Create the service.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7-5
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration
R1
E D A B C H G I F
R4
R2
R3
7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network security. As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security. As shown in Figure 7-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
7-6
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-5 Trail restoration
R1
E D A B C H G I F
R4
R2
R3
7.4 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients. The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection, as listed in Table 7-1. Table 7-1 Service level Service Diamond service Gold service Silver service Copper service Iron service Protection and Restoration Scheme Protection and restoration Implementation Means SNCP and rerouting Switching and Rerouting Time Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s Protection and restoration MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50ms Rerouting time < 2 s Restoration No protection No restoration Preemptable MSP Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s -
Table 7-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7-7
7 ASON Features
Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services Service Level Working Resource of TE Link Not used Not used Protection Resource of TE Link Not used Used when the resource is not enough Not used Not used Non-Protection Resource of TE Link Used Used with the priority
Diamon d service
Service creation Service rerouting Service optimization
Not used Used with the priority Used with the priority Used with the priority Not used Not used
Used Used when the resource is not enough Used when the resource is not enough Used when the resource is not enough Used Used with the priority
Gold service
Used when the resource is not enough Not used
Silver service
Not used Used when the resource is not enough Not used Not used Not used Used with the priority
Not used Not used Not used Not used
Used Used Used Used when the resource is not enough
Copper service
Service creation Service optimization
Iron service
Service creation
7.5 Diamond Services

Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation. A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between
7 ASON Features
the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP. Figure 7-6 shows a diamond service. Figure 7-6 Diamond Services
Working LSP
R1
E D A B C H G F
R4
R2
R3
Protection LSP : ASON NE : User equipment
There are three types of diamond services.

l l l
Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails. Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail. Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 7-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service. Table 7-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service. Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service. Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
l
If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP. If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the service survivability.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7-9
7 ASON Features
Attribute Rerouting
Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service

l l l
Supports rerouting lockout Supports rerouting priority Supports three rerouting policies:

No rerouting constraint Use existing trails whenever possible Do not use existing trails whenever possible
l l l l
Supports setting the revertive mode Supports setting the trigger condition Supports setting the WTR time Supports setting the crankback times Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services Supports migration between diamond services and silver services Supports migration between diamond services and copper services
Revertive
Service migration
Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting
Supports manual switching Supports service optimization Does not support service association Does not support diamond ASON server trails R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
l
When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered. When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered. When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
7-10
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7 ASON Features
Attribute Rerouting
Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service

l l l

Revertive
Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services Supports migration between diamond services and silver services Supports migration between diamond services and copper services
Service migration
Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting
Supports manual switching Supports service optimization Does not support service association Does not support diamond ASON server trails R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Attribute Requirements for creation Protection and restoration Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node
l
When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered. When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is not triggered. When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not triggered. Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections and diamond services Supports migration between diamond services and silver services Supports migration between diamond services and copper services
Service migration
l l
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7-11
7 ASON Features
Attribute Service switching Service optimization Service association ASON server trail
Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service Supports manual switching Supports service optimization Does not support service association Does not support diamond ASON server trails
7.6 Gold Services

Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization. A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or nonprotection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service. As shown in Figure 7-7, a gold service can be configured from A to I. Figure 7-7 Gold services
R1
E D
MSP
R4 MSP
I F C
MSP
A B
R2
G
R3
Table 7-6 lists the attributes of gold services.
7-12
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7 ASON Features
Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services Attribute Requirements for creation Multiplex section protection Gold Service Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node.
l
Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplex section protection chain to create gold services. Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services. Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create gold services.
Protection and restoration Rerouting
When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performed to protect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
l l
Supports rerouting lockout Supports three rerouting policies:

Use existing trails whenever possible. Do not use existing trails whenever possible. No rerouting constraint
l l l l
Supports setting the revertive mode Supports setting the priority Supports setting the WTR time Supports setting the crankback times Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically. Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually.
Revertive
Preset restoring trail Service migration Service switching Service optimization ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting
Supports setting the preset restoring trail Supports migration between permanent connections and gold services. Supports manual switching Supports service optimization Supports gold ASON server trails R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
7.7 Silver Services

The service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7-13
7 ASON Features
Silver services are also called rerouting services. Upon an LSP failure, periodical rerouting is performed until the rerouting succeeds. If there are not enough resources, service may be interrupted. As shown in Figure 7-8, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence, services are protected. Figure 7-8 A silver service
R1
E D A B C H G I F
R4
R2
R3
Table 7-7 lists the attributes of silver services. Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Silver Services Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
7-14
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7 ASON Features
Attribute Rerouting
Silver Services
l l l

l l l
Supports setting the crankback times Supports setting the revertive mode Supports setting the WTR time Revertive services support reverting to the original route automatically. Non-revertive services support reverting to the original route manually.
Revertive
Preset restoring trail Service migration
Supports setting the preset restoring trail

l
Supports migration between permanent connections and silver services Supports migration between diamond services and silver services Supports migration between silver services and copper services Supports service optimization. If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be optimized before reverting to its original route.
Service optimization
l l
Service association ASON server trail Alarms to trigger rerouting
Supports service association Supports silver ASON server trails R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS
7.8 Copper Services

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services. Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute and are interrupted. Table 7-8 lists the attributes of copper services.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7-15
7 ASON Features
Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Service migration Silver Service Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. Does not support rerouting
l
Supports migration between permanent connections and copper services Supports migration between diamond services and copper services Supports migration between silver services and copper services
l l
Service optimization Service association ASON server trail
Supports service optimization Supports service association Supports ASON server trails
7.9 Iron Services

The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources. An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection links or MS protection links to create LSPs. During MS switching, iron services may be preempted and interrupted. When the MS recovers, iron services are recovered. Interruption, preemption and recovery of iron services are reported to the T2000. When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered. Table 7-9 lists the attributes of iron service. Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services Attribute Requirements for creation Multiplex section protection Iron Service Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are available between the source node and the sink node. To create iron services, the following resources can be used:
l l l
Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service restoration Service migration Service optimization

7-16
Does not support rerouting Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent connections Supports service optimization.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7 ASON Features
7.10 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASON server trails. When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level for the tunnel can be gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See Figure 7-9. Figure 7-9 Tunnel
VC4 tunnel
VC12 service R4
R1
R3
R2
ASON domain
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. As shown in Figure 7-10, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a gold ASON server trail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASON automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards. After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the new ports.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7-17
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-10 Lower cross-connnection
VC12 NE1
ASON server trail VC4 NE2
VC12
Cross-connection VC12 Tributary unit Line unit
Table 7-10 lists the attributes of tunnels. Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels Attribute Requirements for creation Service restoration Rerouting Gold Tunnel Same as gold services Same as gold services
l
Silver Tunnel Same as silver services Same as silver services

l
Copper Tunnel Same as copper services Does not support rerouting Does not support rerouting
Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.
Supports rerouting lockout. Supports rerouting priority.
Revertive Preconfiguration of restoring route Service association Service migration Service optimization Tunnel level
Not supported Not supported
Not supported Supported
Not supported Not supported
Not supported
l l
Supported
Supported
Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections. Supports migration between silver tunnel services and copper services.
Supports service optimization. VC-4
7.11 Service Association

The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different points into the ASON network.
7 ASON Features
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points. As shown in Figure 7-11, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP. Figure 7-11 Service Association
R1
E D A B C H G F
R4
I
1+1 Protection
1+1 Protection
R2
R3
Table 7-11 lists the attributes of service association. Table 7-11 Attributes of service association Attribute Service optimization Rerouting Service type Service Association Supports optimization of associated services. When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.
l l l l l l
Supports the association of two silver services. Supports association of two copper services. Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service. Supports the association of two silver tunnels. Supports the association of two copper tunnels. Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.
7.12 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the
7 ASON Features
service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during the service optimization. LSP optimization has the following features.
l l l l l
Only manual optimization is supported. The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service. During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed. During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations, optimization is not allowed. The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper and tunnel services.
7.13 Service Migration

OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l l l l l l
Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections Migration between gold services and permanent connections Migration between silver services and permanent connections Migration between copper services and permanent connections Migration between iron services and permanent connections Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
Service Migration between ASON Trails

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l l l
Migration between diamond services and silver services Migration between diamond services and copper services Migration between silver services and copper services
7.14 Reverting Services to Original Routes

After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.
CAUTION
The operation reverting network-wide services to original routes interrupts the services. Be cautious to perform the operation.
7-20
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
7 ASON Features
Original Route
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted to the original route manually or automatically. In addition, the current route can be set to the original route after rerouting of the ASON services.
Revertive Services
The ASON services supporting the service reverting are as follows:
l l l l
Diamond services Gold services Silver services Tunnel services
Description on Service Reverting

For the detailed description of reverting, refer to the Table 7-12. Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes Attribution Prerequisites Reverting mode Non-Revertive Service The original route has no failures and has free timeslots. Manual Revertive Service The original route has no failures. The services are automatically reverted after 10 minutes. The waitto-revert time can be set. Reverting services to original routes. Reverting services to original timeslots. Supported
Batch reverting Timeslots
Supported Reverting services to original routes. Does not revert services to original timeslots. Supported
Modifying original route
7.15 Preset Restoring Trail

Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing. The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for an ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail.
7.16 Equilibrium of Network Traffic

The ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.
7 ASON Features
The ASON calculates a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many services between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibrium function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-12, there are many silver services between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them to different routes averagely as possible such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I. Figure 7-12 Traffic equilibrium
R1
E D A B C H G I F
R4
R2
R3
7.17 Shared Risk Link Group

In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable. The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk. Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.
7.18 ASON Trail Group

The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 7-13, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.
7 ASON Features
Figure 7-13 LCAS (different path)

Path 1
VCTRUNK1 Router A
NE1 NE2
Router B
Path 2
If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. As shown in Figure 7-14, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected. Figure 7-14 LCAS (same path)
VCTRUNK1
NE1
NE2
Router A
Router B
ASON Trail Group

An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible. Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.
7.19 Protocol Encryption

You can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network. An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network, counterfeit a node of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets transmitted by nodes in the network and repeat the attack. To prevent these network insecurities, the ASON provides the function to encrypt protocols. In an ASON domain, the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are encrypted for authentication. The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces). The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5 authentication. The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent nodes are the same.
8 Protection
8
About This Chapter
Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports equipment level protection and network level protection. 8.1 Equipment Level Protection The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies. 8.2 Network Level Protection The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-1
8 Protection
8.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1 protection for power supplies. 8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards This section describes the TPS protection supported by the equipment in the terms of service type and protection schemes. This section also lists the parameters for the TPS protection. 8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in the safe manner. 8.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. 8.1.4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Boards The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection schemes. 8.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board level 1+1 protection. 8.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. 8.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX. 8.1.8 Intelligent Fans The intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the ambient temperature of the equipment. 8.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. 8.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection, and so on.
8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards

This section describes the TPS protection supported by the equipment in the terms of service type and protection schemes. This section also lists the parameters for the TPS protection. Table 8-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 8-2 lists TPS protection parameters.
8-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8 Protection
Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards Service Type E1/T1 Protection Scheme Main subrack: one 1:N protection (N8) Extended subrack: one 1:N protection (N8) E3/T3/E4/STM-1 Main subrack: two 1:N (N3) protections Extended subrack: two 1:N (N 3) protections Ethernet DDN Two 1:1 protections One 1:N protection (N8) N1PD3, N1PL3, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3, N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4, N1SEP Supported Boards N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1a
N2EFS0, N4EFS0 N1DX1
a: The N2PQ1 board does not support T1 services. Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters Parameter Priority Switching type Switching condition Description 1X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is the highest priority. Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l l
The clock of the working board is lost. The working board is offline. The working board is under a cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Switching time Revertive mode WTR time
50 ms Revertive 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.
8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in the safe manner. For the OptiX OSN 3500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are both protected. Table 8-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-3
8 Protection
Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description By default, slot 9 is for the working board and slot 10 is for the protection board. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l
The working board is offline. The working board is under a cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode
Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
8.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit

With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner. For the OptiX OSN 3500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication (SCC) functions. The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. The 1+1 backup is used for the GSCC. When the active GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state. Table 8-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit. Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description By default, slot 18 is for the working board and slot 17 is for the protection board. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l
The working board is offline. The working board is under a cold reset. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode
Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protection board becomes the working board, and the original working board becomes the protection board.
8.1.4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Boards

The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection schemes. Table 8-5 lists the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection parameters of the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards.
8 Protection
Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Configurable as required. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l l l
The port status of the working board is Link Down. The clock of the working board is lost. The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Revertive mode Switching time
Non-revertive 350 ms
When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching, the following conditions must be met.
l
The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working mode as the protection group. The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends. The working mode should not be modified before the protection group is deleted. Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.
CAUTION
The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of the protection group.
8.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards

The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board level 1+1 protection. Table 8-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards. Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Description Configurable as required.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-5
8 Protection
Parameter Switching condition
Description Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:

l l l l
A manual switching command is issued. The power supply of the board fails. The clock of the board fails. The hardware of the board fails.
Non-revertive 50 ms
8.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit

The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU. Using the two N1PIU boards, the OptiX OSN 3500 can access two 48 V DC power supplies. These two power supplies back up each other. When either of them fails, the other power supply takes over to ensure normal operation of the equipment.
8.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit

The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX. In the OptiX OSN 3500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving. A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection. Table 8-7 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board. Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX Parameter Slots for working and protection boards Switching condition Description Configurable as required. Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
l l
The hardware of the working board fails. A switching command is issued.
Non-revertive 50 ms
8.1.8 Intelligent Fans

The intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the ambient temperature of the equipment.
8 Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan units to realize the heat dissipation. The power supplies of the three fan modules back up each other. The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection. When one of the fan modules becomes faulty, the other operates at its full speed. The running status of the fan is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the fan unit.
8.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner. Using the power backup unit on the N1AUX board, the OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power supply immediately takes over to ensure the normal operation of the board.
8.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions

The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection and overvoltage protection, and so on.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading

The verification function is provided for both applications and data. After software loading is interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply

The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning. When the board has an undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the software re-initializes the chip. The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal. When the board has an undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection

Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, an alarm is generated to remind the maintenance personnel of cleaning the fans.
8.2 Network Level Protection

The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection. 8.2.1 Linear MSP
8 Protection
The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dualended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings. 8.2.2 MSP Ring The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring. 8.2.3 SNCP The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. 8.2.4 DNI The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology. 8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. For the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes can be set accordingly, such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection. 8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. 8.2.7 RPR Protection The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. 8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
8.2.1 Linear MSP

The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dualended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings. The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1+1 and 1:N (N14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 40 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841. For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning Guidelines. Table 8-8 lists the linear MSP parameters. Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters Protection Type 1+1 singleended switching 1+1 singleended switching
8-8
Revertive Mode Nonrevertive Revertive
Switching Protocol Not required Not required
Switching Time 50 ms
Default WTR Time -
Switching Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS
50 ms
600s
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8 Protection
Protection Type 1+1 dualended switching 1+1 dualended switching 1:N dualended switching
Revertive Mode Nonrevertive Revertive
Switching Protocol APS protocol APS protocol APS protocol
Switching Time 50 ms
Default WTR Time -
Switching Condition
l l l
R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD (optional) Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
50 ms
600s
l l
Revertive
50 ms
600s
l l
8.2.2 MSP Ring

The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841. Table 8-9 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Planning Guidelines. Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 Protection Scheme STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring Maximum Number of MSP Rings Supported 2 2 11 12
Table 8-10 lists the MSP ring parameters.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-9
8 Protection
Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters Protection Type Two-fiber bidirectional MSP Revertive Mode Revertive Switching Mode
l
Switchi ng Time 50 ms
Default WTR Time 600s
Switching Condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS
l l l l l l l
Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching Forced switching ring Manual switching ring Exercise switching ring Forced switching span Manual switching span Exercise switching span
Two-fiber unidirectiona l MSP
Revertive
50 ms
600s
R_LOF MS_AIS B2_EXC B2_SD Forced switching Manual switching Exercise switching
Four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Revertive
50 ms
600s
The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following features.
Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain. In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.
8-10
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8 Protection
Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section

For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 3500 is able to process two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical interface.
MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level. In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs. To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 3500 node sets up a detailed list of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that may be misconnected.
8.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the subnetwork connection multipath protection (SNCMP), and the subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP), for subnetworks that meet the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 8-1.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-11
8 Protection
Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail
The unprotected trail
NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5
NE6 NE7 NE8
Convert to an unprotected trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trail
The working trail
NE2 NE1 NE4 NE3 NE5
NE6 NE7 NE8
The protection trail
In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:
l l l l l l
Manual switching to protection path Manual switching to working path Forced switching to protection path Forced switching to working path Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting Revertive mode setting
Table 8-11 lists the SNCP parameters. Table 8-11 SNCP parameters Protection Type SNCP Revertive Mode Revertive Switchin g Time 50 ms Default WTR Time 600s Switching Conditions Any of the following conditions triggers the switching: l R_LOS
l l l l
AU_LOP TU_LOP MS_AIS AU_AIS

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-12
8 Protection
Protection Type
Revertive Mode Nonrevertive
Switchin g Time 50 ms
Default WTR Time -
Switching Conditions
l l l l l l l l
TU_AIS HP_UNEQ HP_TIM B2_EXC B3_EXC B3_SD BIP_EXC BIP_SD
SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path) protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protection scheme. The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP. While the SNCP protects services only in a lineto-line manner, the SNCMP protects services whose source and sink can both be in the line direction or in the tributary direction. Figure 8-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path. Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection
A
Working Source Protection 1 Protection 2 Protection 3 Intermediate subnetworks Sink
In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 8-3, two protection paths protect a working path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
8 Protection
Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking
NE 3 NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2 NE 1
Working Microware Radio
Protection 2
Microware Radio
When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 8-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1. Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 3 NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2 NE 1
Protection 2
Microware Radio
When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty, as shown in Figure 8-5, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2.
8-14
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8 Protection
Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 3 NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2 NE 1
Protection 2
Microware Radio
SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path. The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.
8.2.4 DNI
The DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842. The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networked by equipment from different vendors and take different protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node failure. The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
l l l
Two SNCP rings An SNCP ring and an MSP ring Two MSP rings
Figure 8-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-15
8 Protection
Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings

NE A
SNCP Ring 1 NE C NE D
NE E SNCP Ring 2
NE F
NE G Selecting Point Forward Working Routing Reverse Working Routing
When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
l l l l l l l
A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1. A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2. A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings. NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty. NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty. NE C and NE E are both faulty. NE D and NE F are both faulty.
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty, interring services are not affected.
8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection

When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. For the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes can be set accordingly, such as the MSP, SNCP and non-protection. Figure 8-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
8-16
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8 Protection
Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection

STM-64
STM-64
STM-16 SNCP
STM-16 MSP
8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP

In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface. A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board is able to process multiple sets of independent K bytes. N1SL64, N1SLD64, N2SL64, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 and N1SF16 of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes. Figure 8-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500. Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4/16
STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring STM-16/64
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
STM-4/16 Optical-pathshared MSP ring
STM-4/16
For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown in Figure 8-9. Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
MSP ring 1 STM-16
MSP ring 2
STM-16 STM-16
STM-64
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-17
8 Protection
The OptiX OSN 3500 also supports the line units of the same rate to form a shared protection in two directions, as shown in Figure 8-10. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group. Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate
MSP ring 1 STM-16
MSP ring 2
STM-16 STM-16
STM-16
8.2.7 RPR Protection

The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering. Figure 8-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring. The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets added onto the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node can only perform three types of operations to the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring greatly decreases the communication traffic among nodes. The reason is that a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet. Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 1 Node 5
Node 2
In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets. The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 8-12.
8-18
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8 Protection
Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection

Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 5
Node 2
Node 1
Wapping
The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fiber cut. See Figure 8-13. Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection
Node 4 Outer ring Inner ring Node 3 RPR Node 2 Steering Node 1 Node 5
In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination though in a reverse direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is shortened.
8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection

The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring. Figure 8-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VPRing/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves protection resources, and can be applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
8-19
8 Protection
Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

NE2
ATM service
Working path Protection path
ATM service NE3
NE1
NE4
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up at both the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. Under normal conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.
8-20
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
9 Clock
9
About This Chapter
9.1 Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the following clock sources.
Clock
The equipment can trace several clock sources and provides the clock protection function.
9.2 Clock Working Mode The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781. 9.3 Clock Outputs The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs. 9.4 Clock Protection The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching. 9.5 Tributary Retiming The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit them together to the customer.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
9-1
9 Clock
9.1 Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the following clock sources.
l l l l
External clock source Line clock source Tributary clock source Internal clock source
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports priority setting for clock sources. By default, the internal clock source is of the lowest priority. 9.1.1 External Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock source inputs. 9.1.2 Line Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the line clock source. 9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace tributary clock sources. 9.1.4 Internal Clock Source When all line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or when only internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock.
9.1.1 External Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock source inputs.
l l
Two 75-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
9.1.2 Line Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the line clock source.
9.1.3 Tributary Clock Source

The OptiX OSN 3500 can trace tributary clock sources. The specific tracing relation is as follows.
l
When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the ninth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PQ1, PQM. When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the fourth physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PD3, PQ3. When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to the first physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PL3, DX1.
9-2

l
9 Clock
When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (corresponding to any physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the SPQ4.
9.1.4 Internal Clock Source

When all line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or when only internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the internal clock source as the system clock.
9.2 Clock Working Mode

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781.
l l l
Locked mode Holdover mode Free-run mode
9.2.1 Locked Mode In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 traces one clock source from the line clock source, tributary clock source and the external clock source. 9.2.2 Hold-Over Mode If all clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the frequency information stored before the loss as its clock source. The frequency information complies with the related phase standard defined in ITU-T G.813. 9.2.3 Free-Run Mode The OptiX OSN 3500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose frequency stability is not worse than 4.6 ppm.
9.2.1 Locked Mode

In the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 traces one clock source from the line clock source, tributary clock source and the external clock source.
9.2.2 Hold-Over Mode

If all clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the frequency information stored before the loss as its clock source. The frequency information complies with the related phase standard defined in ITU-T G.813.
9.2.3 Free-Run Mode

The OptiX OSN 3500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whose frequency stability is not worse than 4.6 ppm.
9.3 Clock Outputs

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following clock outputs:
9 Clock
l l l
Line clock outputs Tributary clock outputs External clock outputs

NOTE
For tributary clock outputs, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the tributary retiming function, which helps improve the quality of output tributary clock.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock outputs:

l l
Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
NOTE
For external clock outputs, only two 75-ohm or two 120-ohm clocks but never both can be applied.
9.4 Clock Protection

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM and extended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the synchronization status message (SSM) function for synchronous clocks. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured to realize the protection switching of clocks. 9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled For the OptiX OSN 3500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. In this case, the clock sources are chosen or switched according to the priority list. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source. 9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 3500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality to avoid the generation of clock lock ring. 9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled The standard SSM cannot avoid the clock lock ring in all cases. For this, Huawei presents the concept of the clock source ID.
9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled

For the OptiX OSN 3500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used. In this case, the clock sources are chosen or switched according to the priority list. The clock source with the highest priority is the tracing source. The priority list can be manually configured. Figure 9-1 shows the clock configuration and the priority list when the SSM is not enabled.
9-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
9 Clock
Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled

BITS
Node 1 Priority 1: BITS Priority 2: Internal
Slot 8
Node 2 Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal
Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 8

Node 3 Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal Node 4 Priority 1: Slot 11 Priority 2: Slot 8 Priority 3: Internal
Slot 11 Slot 8 Slot 11
Clock tracing
9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled

The standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 3500 to choose the clock source of the highest quality to avoid the generation of clock lock ring. Figure 9-2 shows the application of the standard SSM. Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM
BITS Fibre break Slot 11 Node 2 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 11 Slot 8 Node 1 Slot 8 Slot 11 Slot 8 Node 4
Node 3 Node 3, Node 2 will automatically Clock select the clock source of best quality.
tracing
9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled

The standard SSM cannot avoid the clock lock ring in all cases. For this, Huawei presents the concept of the clock source ID. The extended SSM uses the first four bits of the S1 byte as the clock source ID and the latter four bits to indicate quality of the clock source. The first four bits of the S1 byte is used to specify a unique ID for a clock source. These four bits are transmitted along with the SSM. When receiving the S1 byte, a node checks if the clock source ID is transmitted by itself. If yes, the node takes the clock source as unavailable. In this way, the clock lock ring is avoided. See Figure 9-4.
9 Clock
Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled
BITS Node 1 BITS failure BITS Node 1
Node 2 Node 3
Clock tracing
Node 2 Clock mutual tracing caused by BITS failure
Node 4
Node 4 Node 3
Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID

BITS
BITS failure
Node 1 Node 2 Node 4
Node 3 Node 1 finds that the ID sent from Node 4 is 1, which is originated from itself. Node 1 will not trace it to avoid the clock mutual tracing.
Clock tracing
A clock source ID can be manually set. In the case of configuration of clock protection for an SDH ring network, the clock ID is always manually set, to effectively avoid the occurrence of clock lock ring. The clock ID is necessary only at key nodes rather than all nodes in an SDH network. Follow the listed rules to set the clock source ID.
l l l
Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS. Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external BITS. In case signals travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every junction node. In case signals travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for the line clock source (if any is involved at a junction node) in the signal traveling direction at every junction node.
9.5 Tributary Retiming

The retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals from a digital synchronization network, and then to transmit them together to the customer. 9.5.1 Retiming Principle With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit reference timing signals.
9 Clock
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function PDH signals can pass through an SDH network without retiming or with retiming.
9.5.1 Retiming Principle

With the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmit reference timing signals. Figure 9-5 shows the retiming principle. Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram
SDH clock source PLL SEC Extract clockf1 Extract clockf0
f1 Input tributary signal
Desynchronization
Retiming buffer
f0 Output tributary signal
The retiming function is performed in the following process:

l l
The phase-lock loop (PLL) is used to extract clock f1 from the received tributary signals. The desynchronization function is used to recover the tributary signal data in an error-free manner, and then to store the data into the retiming buffer. The SDH equipment clock (SEC) f0, which is synchronous with the digital synchronization network, is extracted and then added into the tributary signal data. In this way, the output tributary signals carry a good timing reference, which serves the synchronous service equipment.
9.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function

PDH signals can pass through an SDH network without retiming or with retiming.
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network Without Retiming

Figure 9-6 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network without retiming. On synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid periodical slip. When PDH signals are adapted into the SDH transmission network, pointer justifications cause phase jumps of output PDH signals, and thus frequency f1 of the output PDH signals becomes asynchronous with f0. As a result, the frequency of output signals cannot be used as a timing reference for equipment k, such as a digital stored program control (SPC) switch.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
9-7
9 Clock
Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming

SDH transmission network
PRC f1 f1 S S S S
f 1: PDH
PDH signal frequency
f0
f0 D
Synchronous service equipment i
SDH MUX
SDH MUX
D D D
f1
Synchronous service equipment k The tributary signal frequency cannot be used as a synchronization clock for equipment k.
f 0 : Frequency that traces an SDH PRC S: Synchronization D: Desynchronization R: Retiming PRC : SDH primary reference clock
PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network with Retiming

Figure 9-7 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network with retiming. On synchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid periodical slip. At the network output end, the retiming function provides a local timing reference f0, and thus jitters and wanders caused by pointer justifications are absorbed. Frequency f1 of the output PDH signals is still synchronous with f0, so equipment k can extract tributary timing signals for the synchronization purpose. Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming
Transmission network
PRC f1
Synchronous service equipment i
f1: PDH signal frequency f0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC S: Synchronization D: Desynchronization R: Retiming PRC: SDH primary reference clock SEC: SDH equipment clock
f0 f1 S S S S SDH MUX
f0 D SDH D MUX D D R f0 SEC
f0
Synchronous service equipment k
The tributary signal frequency can be used as a synchronization clock for equipment k.
The transmission network in Figure 9-7 can be a single SDH network, or a combination of several SDH and PDH networks.
9-8
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
10 OAM
10
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 3500 provides maintenance and management functions.
OAM
10.1 Operation and Maintenance The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 system are designed with consideration of the customer requirements for easy operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 3500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers. 10.2 Network Management The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the objectoriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. 10.3 Security Management The T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
10-1
10 OAM
10.1 Operation and Maintenance

The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 system are designed with consideration of the customer requirements for easy operation and maintenance of the equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 3500 system provides powerful equipment maintenance capability for customers.
l
In the case of any emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual alarms to urge the network administrators to take proper measures. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation interfaces to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment. Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators to locate and handle faults as soon as possible. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is raised at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at 60-second intervals and lasts for 2s every time. After the fiber connection recovers, the optical interface at the opposite end detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beam launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches laser beam. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.
The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH and Ethernet optical interfaces. Each line board has the function to monitor lower order alarms. The TU-AIS and TU_LOP alarms can be monitored. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH optical module. The parameters that can be queried include optical interface type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate and wavelength. The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose singlemode or multi-mode optical modules as required. This facilitates the maintenance. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other. The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarms of each NE in a network. The in-service upgrade of the board and the in-service loading of NE software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 3500 system. The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, line boards and cross-connect boards support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test.
10-2
10 OAM
10.2 Network Management

The OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission network management system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH, Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the objectoriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the network equipment. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP) protocol, which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.
10.3 Security Management

The T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE. The T2000 performs the security management over the OptiX OSN 3500 NE in the following ways:
l l l l l l l
NE user management NE login management NE login lockout NE setting lockout NE user group management NE security parameters NE security log

Query the users that login to the NE Delete an NE user Force an NE user out of the login state
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
10-3
11
About This Chapter
Technical Specifications
The technical specifications cover the specifications of optical interfaces, electrical interfaces and environment. 11.1 Interface Types The OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interfaces of different types. 11.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM optical interfaces. This section lists specifications of these optical interfaces. 11.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary interfaces. 11.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with related ITU-T Recommendations. 11.5 Transmission Performance The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T standards. 11.6 Timeslot Numbering The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12. 11.7 Power Supply Specification THe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the input of 48 V or 60 V DC power supply. 11.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards Different boards have different power consumption and weight. 11.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. 11.10 Safety Certification The OptiX OSN 3500 receives several safety certifications.
11.11 Environmental Specification The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper environment for normal operation. 11.12 Environment Requirement The OptiX OSN 3500 requires different environment for storage, transportation and operating. This section lists the environment requirements accordingly.
11-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11.1 Interface Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interfaces of different types. Table 11-1 lists the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Interface Type SDH optical interface Ethernet interface ATM interface PDH/SDH electrical interface DDN electrical interface Clock interface Rate and Feature 155520kbit/s, 622080kbit/s, 2488320kbit/s, 2666057 kbit/s, 9953280kbit/s, 10.71Gbit/s 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX 34368 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s 1544 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s, 34368 kbit/s, 44736 kbit/s, 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s RS232, RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1 Two 75-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz) Alarm interface Auxiliary interface Sixteen alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, alarm concatenated interfaces, four cabinet alarm indicator interfaces Administration interface, orderwire interface, data interface
11.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATM optical interfaces. This section lists specifications of these optical interfaces. 11.2.1 SDH Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types. 11.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types. 11.2.3 ATM Optical Interface The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. 11.2.4 Laser Safety Class The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.
11.2.1 SDH Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types. Table 11-2 lists the specifications for the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Table 11-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Source type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 155520 kbit/s I-1 1260 to 1360 MLM 15 to 8 23 8 8.2 S-1.1 1261 to 1360 MLM 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 L-1.1 1263 to 1360 MLM/ SLM 5 to 0 34 10 10 L-1.2 1480 to 1580 SLM 5 to 0 34 10 10 Ve-1.2 1480 to 1580 SLM 3 to 0 34 10 10
Table 11-3 lists the specifications for the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Type of optical source Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 622080 kbit/s I-4 1261 to 1360 MLM 15 to 8 23 8 8.2 S-4.1 1274 to 1356 MLM 15 to 8 28 8 8.2 L-4.1 1280 to 1335 SLM 3 to 2 28 8 10 L-4.2 1480 to 1580 SLM 3 to 2 28 8 10 Ve-4.2 1480 to 1580 SLM 3 to 2 34 13 10.5
Table 11-4 lists the specifications for the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.
11-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Table 11-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Type of optical source Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Specification 2488320 kbit/s I-16 MLM 1266 to 1360 10 to 3 S-16.1 SLM 1260 to 1360 5 to 0 L-16.1 SLM 1280 to 1335 2 to 3 L-16. 2 SLM 1500 to 1580 2 to 3 L-16. 2(Je) SLM 1530 to 1560 5 to 7 V-16.2 (Je) (BA) SLM 1530 to 1565 U-16.2(Je) (BA+PA) SLM 1550.12
Without Without BA: 2 to BA and 3 PA: 2 to 3 With BA: 13 to 15 With BA: 15 to 18 Without BA and PA: 28 With PA: 32
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
18
18
27
28
28
28
Minimum overload (dBm)
Without BA and PA: 9 With PA: 10
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/ nm)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
12
1200 to 1600
2000
2800
3400
Table 11-5 lists the specifications for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Specification 2.66 Gbit/s Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11-5
Item Classification code a Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm)
Specification SF16+BA (14dB)+PA 1550.12 nm Without BA and PA: 5 to 1 With BA: 13 to 15 Without BA and PA: 5 to 1 With BA: 13 to 15 Without BA and PA: 27.5 With PA: 37 10 10 Without BA, RA and PA: 5 to 1 With BA: 15 to 18 Without BA, RA and PA: 27.5 With PA: 42 10 10 SF16+BA (17dB)+PA SF16+BA(17dB)+RA +PA
Without BA and PA: 27.5 With PA: 37
Minimum overload point (dBm) b Minimum extinction ratio (dB) c
10 10
a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14) indicates that the optical power of the signal after amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC+BA +PA" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC, BA and PA. b: The parameter is that of the PA. c: Parameters in the table are of the optical modules, excluding the amplifiers. Table 11-6 lists the specifications for the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-6 Specifications of the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Source type Mean launched power (dBm) Specification 9953280 kbit/s I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2b L-64.2b (BA) 1530 to 1565 SLM Without BA: 4 to 2 Le-64.2 Ls-64. 2 1530 to 1565 SLM 4 to 7 V-64.2b (BA +PA +DCU) 1550.12
1290 to 1330 SLM 6 to 1
1530 to 1565 SLM 5 to 1
1530 to 1565 SLM 1 to 2
1530 to 1565 SLM 2 to 4
SLM Without BA, PA and DCU: 4 to 1
11-6
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Item
Specification With BA: 13 to 15 With BA: 13 to 15 21 21 Without BA, PA and DCU: 14 With PA: 26 1 1 1 1 8 8 1
11
14
14
14
Minimum overload point (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/ nm)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
6.6
500
800
1600
1200
1600
2040 (with DCU)
Table 11-7 lists the specifications for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-7 Specifications of the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Code content a Specification 10.71 Gbit/s Ue-64.2c FEC+BA(14dB) +PA+DCU(60+80)
c
Ue-64.2d FEC+BA(17Db)+PA +DCU(80 x 2)
Ue-64.2e FEC+BA(17dB)+RA +PA+DCU(60 x 3)
Operating wavelength (nm) Source type Mean launched power (dBm)b Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)b Minimum overload point (dBm)b
1550.12nm SLM 4 to 1 14 1 4 to 1 14 1 4 to 1 14 1
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11-7
Item Minimum extinction ratio (dB)b Dispersion capacity (ps/nm)b
Specification 10 10 10
800
800
800
a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14) indicates that the optical power of the signal after amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC+BA +PA+DCU" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC, BA, PA and DCU. b: The parameters in the table are for only for the optical module, not for the amplifier and the DCU. c: The parameter indicates different distances corresponding to different dispersion compensation values. The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 can output wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDM system. Table 11-8 lists wavelengths and frequencies of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces. Table 11-8 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
11-8
Frequency (THz) 192.1 192.2 192.3 192.4 192.5 192.6 192.7 192.8 192.9 193.0 193.1 193.2 193.3 193.4 193.5
Wavelength (nm) 1560.61 1559.79 1558.98 1558.17 1557.36 1556.56 1555.75 1554.94 1554.13 1553.33 1552.52 1551.72 1550.92 1550.12 1549.32
No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
Frequency (THz) 194.1 194.2 194.3 194.4 194.5 194.6 194.7 194.8 194.9 195.0 195.1 195.2 195.3 195.4 195.5
Wavelength (nm) 1544.53 1543.73 1542.94 1542.14 1541.35 1540.56 1539.77 1538.98 1538.19 1537.40 1536.61 1535.82 1535.04 1534.25 1533.47
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
No. 16 17 18 19 20
Frequency (THz) 193.6 193.7 193.8 193.9 194.0
Wavelength (nm) 1548.51 1547.72 1546.92 1546.12 1545.32
No. 36 37 38 39 40
Frequency (THz) 195.6 195.7 195.8 195.9 196.0
Wavelength (nm) 1532.68 1531.90 1531.12 1530.33 1529.55
Table 11-9 lists the specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-9 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Dispersion limit (km) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload point (dBm) Maximum chromatic dispersion (ps/nm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) OSNR Specification 2 488 320 kbit/s 170 2 to 3 28 9 3400 8.2 640 5 to 1 28 9 12800 10 2 666 057 kbit/s 640 5 to 1 28 9 12800 10 9 953 280 kbit/s 40 4 to 1 14 1 800 10 With FEC: 20 Without FEC: 26
With FEC: 16 Without FEC: 21
11.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types. The specification of the Ethernet optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment comply with IEEE 802.3z and IEEE 802.3u standards. Table 11-10 lists the specifications.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11-9
Table 11-10 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces Interface Type Sourc e Type Transmi tting Optical Power (dBm) 4 to 2 2 to 5 9 to 3 9.5 to 0 15 to 8 19 to 14 Central Wavele ngth (nm) 1480 to 1580 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 770 to 860 1261 to 1360 1270 to 1380 Minimu m Overloa d Point (dBm) 3 3 3 0 7 14 Receiver Minimu m Sensitivi ty (dBm) 22 23 19 17 28 30 Minimu m Extinctio n Ratio (dB) 9 9 9 9 10 10
1000Base-ZX (70 km) 1000Base-ZX (40 km) 1000Base-LX (10 km) 1000Base-SX (0.55 km) 100Base-FX (15 km) 100Base-FX (2 km)
MLM MLM MLM MLM MLM MLM
11.2.3 ATM Optical Interface

The ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces. Table 11-11 and Table 11-12 list the specifications of the ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-11 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Optical source type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Specification 155520 kbit/s Ie-1 1260 to 1360 MLM 19 to 14 31 14 S-1.1 1261 to 1360 MLM 15 to 8 28 8 L-1.1 1263 to 1360 MLM/ SLM 5 to 0 34 10 L-1.2 1480 to 1580 SLM 5 to 0 34 10 Ve-1.2 1480 to 1580 SLM 3 to 0 34 10
11-10
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Item Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Specification 10 8.2 10 10 10
Table 11-12 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 Item Nominal bit rate Classification code Operating wavelength (nm) Optical source type Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Specification 622080 kbit/s S-4.1 1274 to 1356 MLM -15 to -8 28 8 8.2 L-4.1 1280 to 1335 SLM -3 to 2 28 8 10 L-4.2 1480 to 1580 SLM -3 to 2 28 8 10 Ve-4.2 1480 to 1580 SLM -3 to 2 34 13 10.5
11.2.4 Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M. Table 11-13 lists the safety classes of lasers used for the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-13 Laser safety class Laser Safety Class CLASS 1 Board N1SL64, N2SL64, N1SF64, N1SLD64, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2SLQ16, N1SF16, N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N2SLD4, N1SLT1, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N2SL1, N1SLH1, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N1EGS2, N2EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N2EGR2, N1EMR0, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8 BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A, N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4
CLASS 1M
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11-11
11.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliary interfaces. 11.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types. 11.3.2 DDN Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN interfaces. 11.3.3 Auxiliary Interface The OptiX OSN 3500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.
11.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types. Table 11-14 lists the specifications of the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-14 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces Interface Type Code Signal bit rate at the output interface Attenuation tolerance at the input interface Frequency deviation tolerance at the input interface Anti-interference capability of input interface 1544 kbit/s B8ZS, AMI 2048 kbit/s HDB3 34368 kbit/s HDB3 44736 kbit/s B3ZS 139264 kbit/s CMI 155520 kbit/s CMI
ITU-T G.703compliant
ITU-T G.703-compliant
11.3.2 DDN Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN interfaces. Table 11-15 lists the DDN interface types.
11-12
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Table 11-15 DDN interface types Interface Type Framed E1 interface type N x 64 kbit/s interface Description Framed E1 signal Standard Physical and electrical features comply with ITU-T G.703. The frame structure complies with ITU-T G. 704. Complies with ITU-T V.35. Complies with ITU-T V.24. Complies with ITU-T X.21. Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A, RS-422A). Complies with EIA RS-530. Complies with EIA RS-530A.
V.35 interface V.24 interface X.21 interface RS-449 interface RS-530 interface RS-530A interface
11.3.3 Auxiliary Interface

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.
64 kbit/s Interface
Table 11-16 lists the specifications of the 64 kbit/s electrical interface, which is the F1 interface on the AUX board. Table 11-16 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface Item Bit rate Timing signal Coding style Outgoing pulse shape Output interface characteristic Incoming interface characteristic Specification 64 kbit/s From RX ITU-U G.703 ITU-U G.703 ITU-U G.703 ITU-U G.703
RS-232 Interfaces
Table 11-17 lists the specifications of the RS-232 electrical interfaces.The RS-232 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the AUX.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11-13
Table 11-17 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces Item Bit rate Mode Electrical level Specification 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum RS-232 Tx & Rx data only 5 V to 15 V
RS-422 Interfaces
Table 11-18 lists the specifications of the RS-422 electrical interfaces.The RS-422 interfaces are S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the AUX. Table 11-18 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces Item Bit rate Mode Electrical level Specification 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum RS-422 Tx & Rx data only 2.0 V
Orderwire Phone Interface

Table 11-19 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces. Table 11-19 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface Item Speech channel interface Impedance Bandwidth Operating current Input gain Output gain Signaling Analog EOW extension Impedance Bandwidth Tx level Rx level 600 ohms 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 3.51 dBr 3.51 dBr 600 ohms 300 Hz to 3400 Hz 18 mA 4/0/0 dB 0/7/0 dB DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.23 Specification
11-14
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with related ITU-T Recommendations. 11.4.1 Clock Interface Type The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces. 11.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T G. 813.
11.4.1 Clock Interface Type

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces. Table 11-20 lists the clock features of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-20 Clock features Clock Type External synchronization source Synchronization output Feature Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs
11.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance

The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T G. 813. Table 11-21 lists the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment. Table 11-21 Timing and synchronization performance Output Jitter G.813 compliant Output Frequency of Internal Oscillator in Free-Run Mode G.813 compliant Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode G.813 compliant
11.5 Transmission Performance

The transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T standards. Table 11-22 lists the performance of the output jitter and bit error in an SDH/PDH network.
Table 11-22 Transmission performance Jitter at STM-N Interface G.813/G.825 compliant Jitter at PDH Interface G.823/G.783 compliant Bit Error G.826 compliant
11.6 Timeslot Numbering

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12. Table 11-23 and Table 11-24 list the details. Table 11-23 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I) TUG2 (7-1) TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) 1 2 2 4 3 2 2 3 4 4 3 2 4 4 5 TUG2 (7-2) 4 2 5 4 6 5 2 6 4 7 6 2 7 4 8 TUG2 (7-3) 7 2 8 4 9 8 2 9 5 0 9 3 0 5 1 TUG (7-4) 1 0 3 1 5 2 1 1 3 2 5 3 1 2 3 3 5 4 TUG (7-5) 1 3 3 4 5 5 1 4 3 5 5 6 1 5 3 6 5 7 TUG (7-6) 1 6 3 7 5 8 1 7 3 8 5 9 1 8 3 9 6 0 TUG (7-7) 1 9 4 0 6 1 2 0 4 1 6 2 2 1 4 2 6 3
Table 11-24 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II) TUG2 (7-1) TU-3 (3-1) TU-3 (3-2) TU-3 (3-3) 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 4 4 3 4 4 4 5 TUG2 (7-2) 4 5 6 2 5 2 6 2 7 4 6 4 7 4 8 TUG2 (7-3) 7 8 9 2 8 2 9 3 0 4 9 5 0 5 1 TUG2 (7-4) 1 0 1 1 1 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 5 2 5 3 5 4 TUG2 (7-5) 1 3 1 4 1 5 3 4 3 5 3 6 5 5 5 6 5 7 TUG2 (7-6) 1 6 1 7 1 8 3 7 3 8 3 9 5 8 5 9 6 0 TUG2 (7-7) 1 9 2 0 2 1 4 0 4 1 4 2 6 1 6 2 6 3
11.7 Power Supply Specification

THe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the input of 48 V or 60 V DC power supply. Table 11-25 lists the specifications of the power supply. Table 11-25 Power supply specifications Item Power supply mode Nominal voltage
11-16
Specification DC power supply 48 V or 60 V

Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Item Voltage range Max. power consumption
Specification 38.4 V to 57.6 V or 48 V to 72 V 1100 Wa 600 W
Max. current
20 A
a: This value indicates the maximum power consumption for the enhanced subrack.
11.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards

Different boards have different power consumption and weight. Table 11-26 lists the power consumption and weight of boards. Table 11-26 Power consumption and weight of boards Board Power Consumption (W) 30 32 41.2 20 21.61 20 16 12.6 12 16 15 15 15 Weight (kg) 1.12 1.12 1.18 1.10 1.09 1.10 1.04 0.92 0.92 1.04 1.01 1.01 1.00 Board Power Consumption (W) 5 2.5 17.39 35 40 12 12 43.2 23 35 35 35 30 Weight (kg) 0.28 0.28 0.91 1.05 1.04 0.92 0.9 1.04 0.90 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
11-17
N1SL64 N2SL64 N1SLD6 4a N1SL16 N3SL16 N2SL16 N1SLQ4 N2PQ3 N2PL3 N2SLQ4 N1SLD4 N2SLD4 N1SL4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
N1TSB 8 N1TSB 4 N3SL16 A N2SLQ 16 N1EGS 2 N2PD3 N2PL3 A N2EGS 2 N1EGT 2 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0 N1EFS4
Board
Power Consumption (W) 15 15 15 14 14 22 26.15 20 20 0 17 11 6
Weight (kg) 1.00 1.04 1.04 1.00 1.00 1.04 1.082 1.01 1.01 0.42 0.95 0.41 0.41
Board
Power Consumption (W) 30 50 50 54 21 2 6 35 37 40 63 63 27
Weight (kg) 0.98 1.20 1.20 1.10 0.97 0.37 0.44 0.90 0.95 0.90 1.872 1.901 1.81
N2SL4 N1SLQ1 N2SLQ1 N1SL1 N2SL1 N1SLH1 N2SLO1 N1BA2 N1BPA DCU N1SEP1 N1EU08 N1OU08 , N2OU08 N1EU04 N1SPQ4 N2SPQ4 N1MU0 4 N1IXCS A N1PD3
N2EFS4 N1EMR 0 N2EMR 0 N2EGR 2 N1EFT8 A N1ETF8 N1EFF8 N1ADL 4 N1ADQ 1 N1MST 4 N1SXC SA N1SXC SB N1GXC SA N1EXC SA N1UXC SA/B N1IXCS B N1XCE N1GSC C N3GSC C
6 24 24 2 93.656 19
0.4 0.91 0.91 0.41 2.103 1.12
62 65 93.656 25 10 20
2.00 2.00 2.112 1.50 0.88 0.946
11-18
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Board
Power Consumption (W) 15 2 2 22 13 19 5.5 9 15 15 26 1 65 (without interface board) 75 (with interface board)
Weight (kg) 1.00 0.38 0.31 1.01 1.003 1.01 0.35 0.35 1.00 1.22 1.09 0.31 1.10
Board
Power Consumption (W) 0 19 16 x 3 30 x 3 8 0 0 30 2.5 26 36.6 36.6 65
Weight (kg) 0.755 0.96 1.50 x 3 1.50 x 3 1.15 1.01 1.01 1.10 0.37 1.01 1.01 1.01 1.10
N1PL3 N1D34S N1C34S N1PQM N2PQ1 N1PQ1 N1D75S N1D12S N1PL3A N1SLT1 N1SF16 N1D12B N1EMS 4
N1FIB N1AUX N1FAN N1FAN A N1PIU N1MR2 A N1MR2 C N1LWX N1ETS8 N1EFT8 N1IDQ1 N1IDL4 N1EGS 4
N1DX1b N1DXA TN11O BU1 TN11M R4
25 25 16 0.2
0.962 0.848 1.3 0.9
TN11M R2 TN11C MR2 TN11C MR4 N1SLD 16
0.2 0.2 0.2 20
0.9 0.8 0.9 1.10
a: If the transmission distance of the optical module on the N1SLD64 board is 2 km, its power consumption is 41.2 W. b: After the TPS is performed, the power consumption of the N1DX1 board is 31 W.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11-19
11.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The OptiX OSN 3500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127 standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests. Table 11-27 lists the EMC-related test specifications. Table 11-27 EMC test results Item Radiated emission Standard CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A Conducted emission for DC port CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class A EN55022 Class A Immunity to radiated electric field ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-3 (10 V/m) Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-2 (Air discharge: 8 kV; contact discharge: 6 kV) Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for DC ports Immunity to electrical fast transient bursts for signal ports Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-4 (2 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-4 (2 kV) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-5 (4 kV) Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-5 (1 kV) Immunity to continuous conducted interference for DC ports Immunity to continuous conducted interference for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V) ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2 IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V) Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Passed Result Passed
11.10 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 3500 receives several safety certifications. Table 11-28 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received.
Table 11-28 Safety certifications Item Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Standard CISPR22 Class A CISPR24 EN55022 Class A EN50024 ETSI EN 300 386 Class A ETSI ES 201 468 CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A ICES 003 Class A AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A GB9254 Class A VCCI Class A Safety IEC 60950-1 IEC/EN41003 EN 60950-1 UL 60950-1 CSA C22.2 No 60950-1 AS/NZS 60950-1 BS EN 60950-1 IS 13252 GB4943 Laser safety FDA rules 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 IEC60825-1 IEC60825-2 EN60825-1 EN60825-2 GB7247 Health ICNIRP Guideline 1999-519-EC EN 50385 OET Bulletin 65 IEEE Std C95.1 Environment protection RoHS
11.11 Environmental Specification

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper environment for normal operation.
The OptiX OSN 3500 can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table 11-29. Table 11-29 Environment specifications for long-term operation Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature Relative humidity Anti-seismic performance Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 0 to 45 10% to 90% Capable of protecting itself against 7 to 9 Richter scale earthquake
11.12 Environment Requirement

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires different environment for storage, transportation and operating. This section lists the environment requirements accordingly. The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the environment requirements.
l l
GF 014-95: Environment conditions for the communication equipment room ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperaturecontrolled location NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements: Physical Protection
11.12.1 Environment for Storage The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for storage. 11.12.2 Environment for Transportation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for transportation. 11.12.3 Environment for Operation The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for operating.
11.12.1 Environment for Storage

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for storage.
Climate
Table 11-30 lists the climate requirements for storage. Table 11-30 Climate requirements for storage Item Altitude
11-22
Range 5000 m
Item Air pressure Temperature Temperature change rate Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed
Range 70 kPa to 106 kPa 40 to +70 1 /min 10% to 100% 1120 W/s2 600 W/s2 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
Requirement for storing equipment on the customer site: Generally, the equipment must be stored indoors. No water should remain on the floor or leak to the equipment carton. The equipment should be placed away from places where water leakage is possible, such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities. If the equipment is stored outdoors, the following four conditions are required.
l l l l
The carton must be intact. Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton. No water is on the ground where the carton is placed. The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunshine.
Biological Environment
l l
Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete. Keep rodents such as mice away.
Air Cleanness
l
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive dust. The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 11-31.
Table 11-31 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage Mechanical Active Substance Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Content 5.00 mg/m3 20.0 mg/m2h 300 mg/m3
11-23
l
The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined by Table 11-32.
Table 11-32 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage Chemical Active Substance SO2 H2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 11-33 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage. Table 11-33 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage Item Random vibration Sub-Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range Non-steady impact Impact response spectrum II Static load Range 1 m2/s3 5 Hz to 20 Hz 3 dBA 20 Hz to 200 Hz -
300 m/s2, 11 ms 0 kPa
NOTE Static load is the pressure from upside, which the equipment with package can endure when the equipment is piled up in a specific manner.
11.12.2 Environment for Transportation

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for transportation.
Climate
Table 11-34 lists the climate requirements for transportation.
Table 11-34 Climate requirements for transportation Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature Temperature change rate Relative humidity Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed Range 5000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 40 to +70 3/min 10% to 100% 1120 W/s2 600 W/s2 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
The following conditions are required for the transportation.
l l l
The carton must be intact. Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton. No water remains in the transportation tool.
l l
Air Cleanness
l
Table 11-35 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation Mechanical Active Substance Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel Content No requirement 3.0 mg/m2h 100 mg/m3
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Table 11-36 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation Chemical Active Substance SO2 H2S NO2 NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 Content 0.30 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.50 mg/m3 1.00 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 11-37 lists the requirements for transportation of OptiX OSN 3500 equipment. Table 11-37 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation Item Random vibration Sub-Item Acceleration spectral density Frequency range Non-steady impact Impact response spectrum II Static load Range 1 m2/s3 5 Hz to 20 Hz 3 dBA 20 Hz to 200 Hz -
300 m/s2, 11 ms 0 kPa
11.12.3 Environment for Operation

The OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for operating.
Climate
Table 11-38 and Table 11-39 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 11-38 Requirements for temperature and humidity Temperature Long-term operation
11-26
Relative Humidity Short-term operation Long-term operation Short-term operation
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Temperature 0 to 45 5 to 55
Relative Humidity 10% to 90% 5% to 95%
NOTE The temperature and humidity values are tested in the place 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.
Table 11-39 Other climate requirements Item Altitude Air pressure Temperature change rate Solar radiation Heat radiation Air flowing speed Range 4000 m 70 kPa to 106 kPa 5/h 700 W/s2 600 W/s2 1 m/s
l l
Air Cleanness
l
Table 11-40 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance Mechanical Active Substance Dust particle Suspending dust Precipitable dust Gravel Content 3 x 105 particles/m3 0.4 mg/m3 15 mg/m2h 100 mg/m3
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
11-27
Table 11-41 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation Chemical Active Substance SO2 H2S NH3 Cl2 HCl HF O3 CO Content 0.20 mg/m3 0.006 mg/m3 0.05 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.10 mg/m3 0.01 mg/m3 0.005 mg/m3 5.0 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 11-42 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation. Table 11-42 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation Item Sinusoidal vibration Sub-Item Velocity Acceleration Frequency range Impact Impact response spectrum II Static load Range 5 mm/s 5 Hz to 62 Hz 2 m/s2 62 Hz to 200 Hz
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms 0 kPa
NOTE Static load is the pressure from upside, which the equipment with package can endure when the equipment is piled up in a specific manner.
11-28
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
A
A.1 ITU-T Recommendations A.2 IEEE Standards A.3 IETF Standards A.4 Environment Related Standards
Compliant Standards
This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 3500 conforms to.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
A-1
A.1 ITU-T Recommendations

Table A-1 IUT-T recommendations Recommendation G.692 G.694.1 G.694.2 G.702 G.703 G.704 G.707 G.775 G.773 G.774 1-5 G.783 G.784 G.803 G.813 G.823 G.824 G.825 G.826 G.831 Description Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/ s, 8448 kbit/s and 44736 kbit/s hierarchical levels Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defect detection and clearance criteria Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management information model for the network element view Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management Architectures of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
A-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Recommendation G.841 G.842 G.957 G.958 Q.811 Q.812 M.3010 G.661 G.662 G.663 X.86 G.7041 G.7042 I.610 I.630
Description Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface Principles for a telecommunication management network Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical fiber amplifiers Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and subsystems Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems Ethernet over LAPS Generic framing procedure (GFP) Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions ATM protection switching
A.2 IEEE Standards

Table A-2 IEEE standards Standard IEEE Std 802.3 IEEE802.3u Description Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100BaseT Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation Virtual bridged local area networks Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3z IEEE802.1q IEEE802.3ad
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
A-3
Standard IEEE802.1D IEEE802.17
Description Media access control (MAC) bridges Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications
A.3 IETF Standards

Table A-3 IETF standards Standard RFC2615(1999) RFC1662(1994) RFC1661(1994) RFC2514 Description Point-to-point protocol (PPP) over SONET/SDH PPP in HDLC-like Framing Point-to-point protocol (PPP) Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECTIDENTITIES for ATM management
A.4 Environment Related Standards

Table A-4 Environment related standards Standard IEC 61000 ETS 300 019-1-3 NEBS GR-63-CORE Description Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: physical protection
A-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
B Glossary
B
1+1 protection 1:N protection 3R A ATM Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.
Glossary
A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge. A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra traffic signal.
Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. An ATM cell consists of a 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data.
B Bandwidth That value numerically equal to the lowest frequency at which the magnitude of the baseband transfer function of an optical fibre decreases to a specified fraction, generally to -3 dB optical (-6 dB electrical), of the zero frequency value. NOTE - The bandwidth is limited by several mechanisms: mainly modal distortion and chromatic dispersion in multimode fibres. Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply that minimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office. Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit. A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSN series products. That is, the OSN products can add and drop several wavelengths directly.
BITS
Build-in WDM
C Congestion The condition that exists in a network if the capacity needed for the instantaneous traffic exceeds the bandwidth available in the network.
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
B-1
B Glossary
Control plane
A set of communicating entities that are responsible for the establishment of connections including set-up, release, supervision and maintenance. A control plane is supported by a signalling network. The process of developing a model of the echo path which will be used in the echo estimator to produce the estimate of the circuit echo. In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTA transforms parts of a message content from one encoded information type to another, or alters a probe so it appears that the described messages were so modified.
Convergence Conversion
D Distributed transaction DNI A transaction, parts of which may be carried out in more than one open system. Dual Node Interconnection. Both ring networks have two nodes interconnected with each other. DNI not only provides protection for ring-cross services but also for either failed node of two interconnected nodes. Therefore, it improves network availability.
E EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. Ethernet Private LAN. An EPLn service is both a LAN service and a private service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers. Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service that is both a line service and a virtual private service. Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. An EVPLn service is a service that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service. European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EPLn
EVPL EVPLn ETSI F Fairness algorithm
A mechanism that enforces fairness among the nodes on the ring. It applies only to LP and excess Medium priority traffic coming from the MAC client. Each node is assigned a weight, which allows the user to allocate more ring bandwidth to certain nodes. Forward error correction, It is a kind of technology for enhancing the reliability of digital transmission. It can increase transmission distance and improve network performance.
FEC
B-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
B Glossary
IMA
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group. Group of links at one end used to establish an IMA virtual link to other end. Sublayer part of the Physical layer and located between the interface specific Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer and the ATM layer. Virtual link established between two IMA units over a number of physical links (IMA group). Service that is configured directly by the T2000. The service within the transmission network is requested by the T2000 and then created by the NEs control plane through signaling. The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
IMA frame
IMA group IMA sublayer IMA virtual link ASON service
IP over DCC
L Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fibre can be located by setting loopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopback modes: No loopback, outloop, inloop.
M MSP Multiplexer Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides capability for switching a signal from a working to a protection section. An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.
O Orderwire Overhead information It establishes the voice communication among the operators and maintenance engineers work in each working station. Auxiliary Channel Overhead Information is information that may be transferred by an optical network layer but which does not by necessity have to be associated with a particular connection. An example of such an auxiliary channel is a data communications channel for the purposes of transferring management data between management entities. NOTE - These management entities are not trail termination and adaptation functions.
R
Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-3
B Glossary
RPR
Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technology supporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ring configuration. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
Regeneration
S SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transport structures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks. SubNetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. Service Level Agreement. A negotiated agreement between an end user and the service provider. Its significance varies depending on the service offerings. The SLA may include a number of attributes such as, but not limited to, traffic contract, availability, performance, encryption, authentication, pricing and billing mechanism, and so on. The service plane comprises: a) service presentation functionality being presented to the end user; b) service implementation aspects with which the end user interacts. For example, service invocation, control service level agreement function, and so on. Note that a) and b) use the totality of the transfer capabilities including control and management functionalities.
SNCP
SLA
Service plane
T TPS Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment, is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board. Tandem Connection Monitor. In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCM is located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. It uses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of the transport channels on a transmission section (TCM section). Single timeslot on a E1 digital interfacethat is, a 64-kbps, synchronous, full-duplex data channel, typically used for a single voice connection.
TCM
Timeslot
B-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
C Acronyms and Abbreviations
C
A ABR ADM AMI APS ASON ATM B BITS BPA C CAR CBR CC CMI CR-LDP CSPF D DCC DCE DDN
Acronyms and Abbreviations
This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.
Available Bit Rate Add/Drop Multiplexer Alternate Mark Inversion Automatic Protection Switching Automatically Switched Optical Network Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Building Integrated Timing Supply System Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit
Committed Access Rate Constant Bit Rate Continuity Check Coded Mark Inversion Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol Constrained Shortest Path First
Data Communication Channels Data Circuit-terminal Equipment Digital Data Network
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
C-1
DVB-ASI DWDM E ECC EMC EPL EPLAN ESCON ETS ETSI EVPL EVPLAN F FC FE FEC FPGA G GE GFP GMPLS H HDB3 HDLC I IEC IEEE IETF IGMP IMA
Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Embedded Control Channel Electromagnetic Compatibility Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN Enterprise Systems Connection European Telecommunication Standards European Telecommunications Standards Institute Ethernet Virtual Private Line Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
fiber Channel Fast Ethernet Forward Error Correction Field Programmable Gate Array
Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure General Multiprotocol Label Switching
High Density Bipolar of order 3 code High level Data Link Control
International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet Engineering Task Force Internet Group Management Protocol Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
C-2
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
ITU-T L LACP LAN LAPS LB LCAS LCT LPT LSP M MAC MADM MCF MLM MPLS MSP N NEBS nrt-VBR NS O OADM OAM OAM&P OSP OTM P PDH PE
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Local Area Network; Local Area Network Link Access Procedure-SDH Loopback Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Local Craft Terminal Link State Path Through Label Switch Path
Media Access Control Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer Message Communication Function Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser) Multiprotocol Label Switching Multiplex Section Protection
Network Equipment-Building System Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate Network Side
Optical Add/drop Multiplexer Operation, Administration and Maintenance Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision OptiX Software Platform Optical Terminal Multiplexer
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Provider Edge
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
C-3
PPP Q QoS R RPR RSTP rt-VBR RSVP-TE S SDH SFP SLA SLM SNCP STP T TCM TPS U UBR V VC VCC VLAN VP VPC VPN W WDM WTR
Point-to-Point Protocol
Quality of Service
Resilient Packet Ring Rapid Span Tree Protocol Real Time Variable Bite rate Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering Extensions
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Small Form Pluggable Service Level Agreement Sigle-Longitudinal Mode (laser) Sub-Network Connection Protection Span Tree Protocol
Tandem connection monitoring; Tributary Protection Switching
Unspecified Bit Rate
Virtual Channel Virtual Channel Connection Virtual Local Area Network Virtual Path Virtual Path Connection Virtual Private Network
Wavelength Division Multiplexing Wait-to-Restore
C-4
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
Index
Index
A
access capacity slot, 2-4 ASON copper service, 7-15 diamond service, 7-8 end-to-end, 7-5 equilibrium of network traffic, 7-21 feature, 2-18 gold service, 7-12 iron service, 7-16 link control link, 7-3 TE link, 7-4 mesh networking, 7-6 preset restoring trail, 7-21 protocol encryption, 7-23 reverting route, 7-20 service association, 7-18 service migration, 7-20 service optimization, 7-20 shared risk link group, 7-22 silver service, 7-13 SLA, 7-7 software, 4-5 trail group, 7-22 tunnel, 7-17 ATM application, 5-25 function, 5-23 protection, 5-29 ATM service, 2-7 auxiliary board, 3-40
C
cabinet, 3-2 clock, 2-23 clock output, 9-3 clock protection extended SSM enabled, 9-5 SSM not enabled, 9-4 standard SSM enabled, 9-5 clock source external, 9-2 free-run mode, 9-3 hold-over mode, 9-3 internal, 9-3 line, 9-2 locked mode, 9-3 tributary, 9-2 cross-connect capacity, 2-3
D
data processing board, 3-37 DDN application, 5-32 function, 5-31 service, 2-7 DDN processing board, 3-36
E
E13 function, 2-19 electromagnetic compatibility, 11-20 environment operation, 11-26 specification, 11-21 storage, 11-22 transportation, 11-24 EPL based on port, 5-7 based on port+VLAN, 5-8 EPLAN, 5-9 ETH-OAM, 2-20 Ethernet
B
board function, 3-30 software, 4-2 type, 3-30 board version replacement, 2-22 built-in WDM, 2-13
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
i-1
Index
application, 5-7 function, 5-2 protection, 5-11 service, 2-7 EVPL, 5-8 EVPLAN, 5-10 extended subrack, 2-14
optical booster amplifier board, 3-39 OSI over DCC application, 6-8 feature, 6-8
P
PDH processing board, 3-35 PDH service, 2-7 PRBS function, 2-21 protection 1+1 BPS, 8-4 1+1 for ATM board, 8-5 1+1 for WDM, 8-6 1+1 hot backup cross-connect and timing, 8-3 PIU, 8-6 SCC, 8-4 1+1 PPS, 8-4 1:N for +3.3 V, 8-7 DNI, 8-15 equipment level, 2-17 fiber-shared virtual trail, 8-16 linear MSP, 8-8 MSP ring, 8-9 network level, 2-18 optical-path-shared MSP, 8-17 RPR, 8-18 SNCP, 8-11 TPS, 8-2 under abnormal conditions, 8-7 VP-ring/VC-ring, 8-19
H
hot fix, 2-21 HWECC application, 6-5 feature, 6-4
I
intelligent fan, 8-6 inter-board alarm suppression, 2-21 interface administration, 2-10 alarm, 2-10 ATM service, 2-10 clock, 2-10 DDN service, 2-9 Ethernet service, 2-9 orderwire, 2-10 PDH service, 2-9 SAN service, 2-10 SDH service, 2-9 type, 11-3 IP over DCC application, 6-6 feature, 6-6
R
REG function, 2-16 retiming application, 9-7 principle, 9-7 ROPA system, 2-13 RPR application, 5-18 function, 5-14 protection, 5-20 service, 2-7
L
LCAS dynamic bandwidth adjustment, 5-11 virtual concatenation group protection, 5-12
M
M13 function, 2-19
N
NE software, 4-3 network application, 1-1 networking, 2-11
S
safety certification, 11-20 SAN feature, 5-30 service, 2-8 SDH DCN background, 6-2 HWECC, 6-4 IP over DCC, 6-6 OSI over DCC, 6-8 solution, 6-3
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
O
OAM information interworking, 2-22 network management, 10-3 security management, 10-3 operation and maintenance, 10-2
i-2
Index
SDH processing board, 3-33 SDH service, 2-6 service access capacity, 2-8 slot access capacity, 2-4 allocation, 3-5 software board, 4-2 software package loading, 2-20 software structure, 4-2 specification ATM optical interface, 11-10 auxiliary interface, 11-13 clock interface , 11-15 colored optical interface, 11-9 DDN interface, 11-12 Ethernet optical interface, 11-9 interface, 11-3 laser safety class, 11-11 PDH electrical interface, 11-12 power consumption and weight, 11-17 power supply, 11-16 STM-1 optical interface, 11-3 STM-16 optical interface, 11-4 FEC, 11-5 STM-4 optical interface, 11-4 STM-64 optical interface, 11-6 FEC, 11-7 subrack, 3-28 wavelength and frequency, 11-8 subrack structure, 3-4 system architecture, 3-30
T
T2000 system, 4-4 TCM, 2-19 timeslot numbering, 11-16 timing and synchronization performance, 11-15 transmission performance, 11-15
W
WDM board, 3-39
Issue 01 (2007-06-15)
i-3

Appendix A-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007 - 01)

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Appendix A-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007 - 01)

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R007

Issue Date Part Number

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

10.3 Security Management..................................................................................................................................10-3

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

About This Document

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

6 DCN Features 7 ASON Features 8 Protection

B Glossary C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

About This Document

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Document

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity

5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4) 5 Gbit/s (32 x 32 VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4)

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

Lower Order Cross-Connect Capacity

20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4) 20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4)

40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4) 40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4)

1.25 Gbit/s (8 x 8 VC-4)

2.1.2 Slot Access Capacity

2.5Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s 622Mbit/s 622Mbit/s

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Product Description

2.5Gbit/s 10Gbit/s 10Gbit/s

1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 1.25Gbit/s 2.5Gbit/s